Home
        K151/-K152/-K153 Avionics Standards GBAS
         Contents
1.                                                                                     50        lt      gt     8 1 5  CLOCK MUL TPIEN rirerire en S ER ENE DE MASE Eais    SOURcCeshws EBB ES GEOGCK SOURCO       recette rte tte                                 3           lt       gt                                                                                                                E 192    SOURce  hw   BB ILS CLOCKk SYNChronization MODE                   eese 193    SOURce lt hw gt   BBiILS  LOCalizer  COMId GODE      carter tee ttp rette rtt                 145    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid DASH    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  COMid DEPTh                   sees nennen nennen nnne 145   SOURceshws EBB IES EOCalizer COMid DQT      2cc ttt ete teet eate ret               cea 146    5            lt       gt                                                                               146    5           lt      gt       11 5 1                                                           gt           5                                           cp tet t                     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer   COMid SYMBOl 22 1 cuoi it eite err               SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  COMid TSCHema   SOURce  shw  BB ILS LOCalizer COMid  S TATe              irren cte tene t ttp          SOURce  sliwS EBB IES EOCalizer DDM COUPlimng    s aci                                    lt       gt                                                                        nen
2.                                                                       63  General                      63  System Configuration            65                                     65                                 65  Position                                                              66                                                          cosets 67  DME Configuration and                                                                        70  General                         ee fied cote cee Sect        sen                                        70  System Configuration Settings    nnns 72  Signal SEMINGS EE 72  Pulse           errori eet Pent                   75  RECEIVE            EE 76                           EE 77  COM ID Settings      EE 79  Adjustiment FACIONS                                       onsec rp esee               82  Trigger Marker Clock                                                                            85  Trigger Settings    oriente                              85  Marker Settings GBAGS                           90  Marker Settings DME                     irent                                              92  Clock S                                                      n 94   CIGPEI  DSBunc                                           96  How to Work with the GBAS                                                                 97  Generating GBAS Signals with Several Frequency Channels                                 97  Generating a GBAS Si
3.                                                                    7  Typographical                                                                                        nnne nnne nnne nnns 9  Notes on Screenshots                                                                    9  Welcome to the Avionics            5                                                       10  Accessing the Avionics                                                                      11  prop e EE 12  About the Avionics                                                                              13  The Ground Based Augmentation System                                                             13  The Instrument Landing System  ILS                                      19  VHF Omni Directional Radio Range  VOR                              eese 21  Distance Measurement Equipment  DME                                 eene 22  GBAS Configuration and                                                                      24  General Settings               oiii rente etta re nk a                                  24  VDB Transmitters Configuration Settings                             eene 27  Scheduling 5                                      30  Message Configuration                                                                     30  Message Type  2 Parameter Sis  ccc           31  Message             4 Parameters iiss            33  Differential GNSS Parameters    enne 41  Filter Clipping Settings
4.                                                        Configure and enable standard marker signal      KEK K KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK               ck ck KKK KKK  SOURCe1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut1 MODE RATio  SOURCe1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPutl ONTime 40  SOURCe1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPutl OFFTime 20    GBAS Settings    77 ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck 0k Ck 0k 00k 0k 0k 0k 00k 0k 00k                ck ck ck ck ck kk ko ko ck ko ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk k ko ko ko       Configure and enable signal generation                                                                                                                                            SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger SOURce INTernal   SOURce1 BB GBAS T  SOURCe1 BB GBAS STAT       SOURce1 BB GBAS T  SOURce1 BB GBAS T  SOURce1 BB GBAS T     Stopped  500      1                   500      1                      Run             IGger SEQuence ARETrigger           Gger EXECute           IGger ARM EXECute    vs     Gger   RMODe          IGger EXECute                       i    Gger  RMODe        Example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation settings  The follwoing is a general example on working with these settings     SOURce1 BB GBAS   PRESet    SOURce1 BB GBAS SRINfo      Response   10 5 kHz   SOURcel1 BB GBAS FILTer  TYPE      Response  COS  SOURCe1 BB GBAS FILTer PARameter COSine           Response  0 6  SOURCe1 BB GBAS FILTer PARameter COSine COFS           Response 0  SOURce1 BB GBAS MSET M
5.                                                  175                                                                    eren eee rhe              175    5                 gt                                          OK                            rei acier np ie Eee                              176    500       lt      gt                                                                         175    5                gt                         5        5                                                             ora ine tian                            177    SOURceshw   BB DME ANALysis RDIStance          ien                                             ela hd exea 176    SOURceshw     BB DME ANALysis STA Te    ennt n tnr                                                176     SOURceshw   BB DME ANALysis TIME OK           ee ront                                177                  SOURceshw    BB DME ANALysis UAFaCctor                     ternera ohne rho ore nte dg 178    SOURceshw  BB IDME CGLOGCIMODBE                          be        RR rei          191    SOURceshw    BB DME CLOCK MULTiplier           iu incon                                                                        191    SOURceshw   BB DME GEOCK SOUR6e        iir n rete                                 E e at 192    SOURce  hw   BB DME CLOCKk SYNChronization EXEQCute                       sess 192    SOURce  hw   BB DME CLOCKk SYNChronization MODE                                                             193
6.                                             SOURce lt hw   BB DME SETTING S                                                                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing STORe FAST     SOURceshiwP  BB DME SHADe        ent eterne a                    SOURc  shw  EBB DME SINGIe         renean tir                                                                DME              2 cort rette atem eden esty                             lt      gt                                         ne a rn e tene n drea ke Dn ed             lt        gt                                       t t prr rr enero               DER REX e eee             SOURce  hw   BB DME TRIGger ARM EXEQUte                   eese                 182    SOURceshw   BB DME TRIGger EXEQUte          ttn nr ener n terr neenon 183    SOURce  hw   BB DME TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut                  essent 183    SOURce  hw   BB DME TRIGger OBASeband DELay                      eese 184    SOURce  hw   BB DME TRIGger OBASeband INHibit                        essent 184  50           lt       gt                                                        Ra    kn 184    SOURceshws BB DME  TRIGger SLENGU   eerren eren nrbi rtr ee censeat ere ku enu RR        184    SOURceshw   BB DME TRIGger SOURCe      rtp                       185                 lt       gt                                               lt      gt                           185    5             lt       gt                                               lt 
7.                                            193   5           lt      gt                                                                                                                 193                 lt      gt          9                                                                                                        193                lt      gt                          8                                                                                    193                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CLOCk MODE  lt MOde gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCk MODE  lt Mode gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS CLOCk MODE  lt MOde gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR CLOCk MODE  lt MOde gt     Sets the type of externally supplied clock     Parameters    lt MOde gt  CHIP   MCHip     RST  CHIP    Manual operation  See  Clock Mode  on page 95                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CLOCk MULTiplier  lt Multiplier gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCk MULTiplier  lt Multiplier gt     Clock Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS CLOCk MULTiplier  lt Multiplier gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR CLOCk MULTiplier  lt Multiplier gt    Note  This command is available for clock source  External  and in clock mode  Multi   ple Sample  only        The command specifies the multiplier for clock type  Multiplied   BB  xxx CLOCk   MODE MSAMple in the case of an external clock source  where xxx stands for ILS              VOR      DME   Parameters    lt Multiplier gt  integer  Range  1 to 64   R
8.                                 185                lt      gt                                                    lt      gt                                                              185   50       lt      gt   88 1 5                               lt      gt                                                                   185                lt      gt                                              lt      gt                                                                185    5           lt      gt                                                lt      gt                         2  2 0             186   5           lt      gt                                                    lt      gt   1                                                           186   50         lt      gt   88 1  5                               lt      gt   1                                                   186    5             lt      gt                                              lt      gt  1                         2                             186                lt      gt                                                                                                 186    5           lt      gt       5                                                                  2 1  4 4201 4141 000 6 6                          186   SOURcexhw   EBB IESETRIGger   SEQuUence                       186    SOURce  hw   BB VOR  TRIGger  SEQuence                   essen 186      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger ARM
9.                               42  Filter SOtiInG  E 43  Modulation                                          45  Clipping Settings                                     45  Global          0                                                                                   46  ILS Configuration and                                                                           47  General  Sein S arseen ana aS Ennai                                                    47  System Configuration Settings   Glide 5                                                                   49  Signal SENGS                                                                           49    5 2 2   5 3  5 3 1  5 3 2  5 3 3   5 4  5 4 1  5 4 2    6 1  6 2  6 2 1  6 2 2  6 2 3    7 1   7 2  7 2 1  7 2 2  7 2 3  7 2 4  L235  7 2 6    8 1  8 2  8 3  8 4  8 5    9 1  9 2    Amiplitude Settings                                                     51  System Configuration Settings                                                                                  53  lensis                                       54  Amplitude Settings    urere te                               55  COMI ID                                                                      M 58  System Configuration Settings Marker                                                                       60  Signal                      caseo eec v ec eve de P x dec      60  COM ID                                       Ld cid      61  VOR Configuration and  
10.                   vu Vago    108  PSOURCEShW gt         VOR             er rtr                                      cds                  108   lt s  bsystem PRE                        108                       gt                                                      108   5  0                gt                                                    108    SOURceshw  pBBULES PRESl                           108  ESOURceshw gt   BB  VOR                              108   lt subsystem  SET                                     108  fSOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing GAValOG                            108   5             lt        gt                                       00                                                   nennen 108  5                                                                108   SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SET TiIng CA Val0g 2                                     108   lt s  bsysteme        Ting                                                        108   SOURcCeshw   BB  DME  SET                                          108   SOURcCe  hw EBB GBAS SET Ting DELete            2 1  rre ance c      109  ESOURceshw  TBBHJES SET Ting DELETE                                         109    5           lt      gt                 5                                                  ia ia 109    s  bsystem  iSET      LOAD             is                                   109  ESOURceshw  EBBIDME SETTiIBO        cr tret ipeo teen ere an e                 109   SOURCeshw    BB GBAS S
11.                  SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger   EXTernal lt ch gt     DELay on page 185    SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  TRIGger   EXTernal lt ch gt    DELay on page 185    SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  TRIGger   EXTernal lt ch gt    DELay      page 185     SOURce lt hw gt           DME  TRIGger   EXTernal lt ch gt     DELay      page 185      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger   OBASeband  DELay      page 184    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger OBASeband  DELay on page 184      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger   OBASeband  DELay      page 184      SOURce lt hw gt           DME  TRIGger   OBASeband  DELay on page 184                Marker Settings GBAS    Trigger Inhibit   For external trigger signal or trigger signal from the other path  sets the duration a new  trigger event subsequent to triggering is suppressed  In  Retrigger  mode for example   a new trigger event will not cause a restart of the signal generation until the specified  inhibit duration does not expire     Remote command                         SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit      page 186     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit               186     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  TRIGger  EXTernal  ch    INHibit      page 186     SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME  TRIGger  EXTernal  ch    INHibit      page 186    SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger  OBASeband  INHibit on          184       SOURce lt hw gt           ILS  TRIGger OBASeband  INHib
12.                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RFINdex  lt Refldx gt        Sets the refractivity index     Parameters    lt Refldx gt  integer  Range  16 to 781   RST  16  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Refractivity Index  on page 32                              SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RLETter  lt Rlet gt     Sets the runway letter     Parameters    lt Rlet gt  NLETter   LETR   LETL   LETC   RST  NLETter  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Runway Letter  on page 37    GBAS Settings                                                                     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  RNUMber  lt Rnum gt     Sets the runway number     Parameters    lt Rnum gt  integer  Range  1 to 36   RST  1  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Runway Number  on page 37               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPDF  lt Rpdf gt        Sets the reference path data selector for FAS     Parameters    lt Rpdf gt  integer  Range  0 to 48   RST  1  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Reference Path Data Selector  on page 37            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPDT  lt Rpdt gt     Se
13.                  lt      gt                                                              165    SOURce lt hw gt   BB        EFFICIENCY                          165    SOURCGSlIW  BB IDME EAEL 7   irn                    eR ER ra E iret                    165     SOUBRceshw   BB DME FREQUGnCy    ttr roo th ete                        166    SOURceshw T  BB DME CAO CHANnel       i oc tn Epor ph      hit tec eee abt             166    SOURceshw5 BB DME ID GOBDE         21r rer rnt rt irre x nere                   178    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID DASH     SOURCeshw  EBB DME ID IDOT       21  tra                   SOURCeslW   BB IDME ID EET                             coerente          eio EE D ico         SOURceshiw2  BB DME DB PER  IOG       2      eene        ai               ue n ERR EI                           gt                           TATE           htt eee I                            lt   2                                                                lt      gt                                                                   gt                     Be                                                      E SOURce lt hw gt   BB DMESID SY   MBO                           i iere ch ioni              lt      gt                                                                               l BB DME IDE                    esee itr cn       SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MARKer lt ch gt  DELay          50         lt                                      gt                            
14.                 gt  BB                                                          108  ESOURGeshiw   BB IES S DAT    cte tme tette ertt rete seemed trennen rene teme      139    SOURce  shw    BB ILS TRIGger ARM EXEQOUte                  eese                     182    SOURceshw   EBB IES LRIGSer  EXE QUI       encontre tti          etienne        E ENERE ENESE 183   500       lt      gt         5                                                                                                         183    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger 0BASeband DELay     lt            lt      gt       1 6                                                                  21 0                                            184  ESOURceshw gt   BBiILS TRIGGErPRMODG         tee trt tete                             184    SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS TRIGGER SLENGU                                                                                            ESOURcE lt hw gt   BBilLS  TRIGGER SOURCE pareren                       t rr nere            E ATANN TE            SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   DELay    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TYPE               SOURce  shw   BB ILS   GS GSLope  DDM COUPling                           erei eterne    SOURce  shw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM CURRSent                       essent ennemi    5           lt      gt        115  55 651        0                                                
15.                165    5           lt        gt                                                          166  ESOURce lt hw   BBDMEICAO CHANING                          et treten eene tne 166                   DME                                          E EEE             167                  lt  BB DME PPS E                                  168   SOURCE                            rabo pea rte                                  168  ESOURGe  hwPEBBIDME RDISEGO                    ta tg en ro             168  ESOURcexshw  EFBB DME RDlIStance UNIT                     169   Sogublceshw  rBEDMEISE              tenete hates e pte tee e Rapt rano                  aiian 169  E SOURCe  chwPI BBIDME SHADPSO      ceret kate atq eet                    169   SOURceshw   EBB DME SINGIe                          170  FSOURCe lt hW gt   BB DME                                                         Aa               170                 lt      gt                                                            1  11 111111116                                   170  FSOURceshw gt  t EB  DME IPINPUED ELA  t m ane ceto era      171    5           lt      gt                                                    1                       40 124 4011 4                  171                 lt      gt                                                                          0010 00010                                172                         BR  ME VIDT ceii                          ee      172                      
16.                184                  lt        gt                                                                                                                                       184                 lt      gt                                                     184  ESOURcGCe  hwPEBB  GBAS TRIGSerIRMOJBDG     2                                    184  ESOURceshw  EBBHAES TRIGger RMODe         aoo eoe                                  184                 lt      gt                                                                     184    5           lt      gt                             5                            0 0000  eene nnne 184   SOURce lt hw  gt   BB GBAS                                            184                       gt                                                                 185    SOURce  hw   BB VOR TRIGger SLENGQIth                 sse nennen 185    SOURce  hw     BE GBAS TRIGSer SL                peut 185   SOURcexshw  EBB DME TRIGger SO Rte            1          185    9           lt      gt                                500                                                            ana nnne            185    5           lt      gt       115               5                        1  1    1002000 0     1             nennen rnnt 185     5            lt       gt                                                                      185                lt      gt                                               lt        gt                              
17.                SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM DlRection                            eese                lt      gt           65 681                                                                                      141                lt         gt            6                                                           ener nennen 141    SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM POLarity                             esee eene nnne 141    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope   DDM STEP inset iot ec eere neri ei i eR      141    SOURceshws  BB IES  GS GSLope FREQUeTFICy        exerit ent nent ert                                                      142    SOURce  shw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  FREQuency MODE                    esee neret enne 142                 lt      gt        _85  65 651        1                                                                               142    SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  LLOBe   FREQuency                         eese 143     SOURce lt hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope                    e ttftt atre 143    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLopel   PHAS Si                                                               143    3  0         lt       gt            6                0                          144    5           lt      gt       115  55 651        1                                                         144    SOURceshw  BB IES   TRIGger   SEQuUeriCe                                               tnt                         rines 186    SOURce lt hw
18.               199                                                       cera 199                          a                                             199  pl  r                                                          201  yel com                                                reer 201  Supported File Formats                              202  Waypoint Fil                    roc ntu ete rnnt ta cte er nee 202  GBAS Differential File                                                                  203  Glossary  Specifications and                                                             206  List           tt 207   j                                                        214    About this Manual    1 Preface    1 1 About this Manual    This operating manual provides all the information specific to the Avionics options   All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating  modes are described in the main R amp S SMBV operating manual     The main focus in this manual is on the provided settings and the tasks required to  generate a signal  The following topics are included       Welcome to the Avionics options R amp S SMBV K111  K151  K152  K1153  Introduction to and getting familiar with the options       About the Avionics options  Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the signal  generation       GBAS  ILS  VOR  DME Configuration and Settings  A concise description of all functions and settings available
19.               55                               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  FLAA             500       lt      gt                         lt      gt                                        SOURceshw  EBB GBAS VDBsch   MCONflg F VAA             naeh tenete t ttn enn                           tabes    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig GCID                         eese nennen nnne        0            2                                                                                                                     5           lt      gt        6    5        lt      gt               6 lt 5                                              126   500       lt      gt                       lt      gt                 55                                     126    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates DECimal                                    126   5           lt      gt                        lt      gt                                                                                                       127     5           lt      gt                        lt      gt             _                                                                           128   500       lt      gt                        lt      gt                                                   128    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig LOCation COORdinates DECimal                                      129     5           lt      gt                        lt      gt   
20.            lt      gt                                                 22 2222            146    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid PERiod                   eese 146    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid S YMBol                 sess 147    SOURce  hw    BB ILS LOCalizer  COMid TSCHema                     eese essen nan 010    147   50          lt      gt         5                            5                   147    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM COUPling                  essen 147   SOURce  shw  BB IES LOCalizer DDM CURRent            iieri ie esa case apa sanant       148   50           lt      gt   8    5                                                                                           148    ILS Settings                    lt        gt                                                                                                 148               lt        gt        5             DDM               entr tette Rr E          149   85           lt      gt        9 1                                                                                          149  LSOURce lt shw gt tBBILS LOCalizer DDM DEP TR     creda ta eet t ea        149                 lt        gt                                                               1                                                                 150    5           lt      gt       1151                                                              1 4 12 44 41                                          150                
21.           2             140   50         lt      gt   88 1 51 65  65                                                       00 0 0 00                                                   140    SOURce  hw  BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM LOGarithmic                       sese 141   50       lt      gt   88 1 51 65  65                                                     141   SOURcexhw   BB ILSEGS GSLope FDDM POLarity                iier ta ecce ina ecce      141  ESOURce  hw  TEBBIESEGS GSEope DDM S TEP           icono trc                141   SOURce  hw    BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM DEPTh                eee 142   SOURCe  shw  BBHIES GS GSEope  F REQURG                      nn 142   50       lt      gt   88 1 51 65  65                                                                                      142   50          lt      gt   88 1 51 65 65                                                                               142    ILS Settings    SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  LLOBe   FREQuency                      sse 143   SOURce  hw  EBB IESE GS GSLope  MODE                 143   SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  PHASe                  sse 143  ESOURce lt hw gt   BB IES GSIGSLome                                  144  LSOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS   GS GSLope  01                                                                                                 144      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM COUPling   Coupling     Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of su
22.           _                                           5                                            129    5           lt      gt              5         lt      gt                   25                  2   s   500       lt      gt                         lt      gt                     5                       es   500       lt      gt                         lt      gt                                            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RFINdex     E                lt       gt                        lt      gt                                                    nennen    SOURce  hw     BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig  RNUMber                     esses    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig RPDF                    essen       5           lt      gt        6    5          lt      gt                                SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig RPIF                        esee eiee   500       lt      gt                         lt      gt                        200 0                 SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RUINdicator   s    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  RUNCertainty                        essen 133                lt       gt                        lt      gt                                        1                     133   500       lt      gt                        lt      gt               5                                                                     134    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig TDSSta
23.          3 4 VOR    The default settings for the VOR standard are   Table 1 9  VOR default settings             Parameter Value  State Not affected by Set to default  Carrier Frequency Mode User Defined             Supported File Formats                                     Parameter Value  Carrier Frequency 108 000 000 000 MHz  Mode Norm  VAR REF Frequency 30 0 Hz  VAR Depth 30 0    Subcarrier Frequency 9 960 0 kHz  Subcarrier Depth 30  0   REF Deviation 480 Hz  Bearing Angle 0 00 deg  Direction From  COMIID State Off             A 4 Supported File Formats    A 4 1    The R amp S SMBV supports the following file formats      waypoint files  see chapter A 4 1   Waypoint File Format        page 202     e files with GBAS differential data  see chapter A 4 2   GBAS Differential File For   mat   on page 203     These files use predefined file extensions and file structure     Waypoint File Format    The waypoint files use the file extension     txt  The file format is a list of coordinates   longitude  latitude  altitude  and a respective resolution in milliseconds  see exam   ple  Contents of the predefined waypoint file Braunschweig txt  on page 202      Example  Contents of the predefined waypoint file Braunschweig txt    The resolution command at the beginning of the format specifies the sampling interval  to be used for the WGS84 geodetic coordinates list  The resolution gives the time  in  ms  between two consecutive waypoints     RESOLUTION  10000  0 48270840370976 52 32054
24.          Parameters    lt DelLenOff gt  float  Range  0 to 2032  Increment  8   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Delta_Length Offset  on page 39               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig FDSState  lt Fdss gt   Enables the configuration of Final Approach Segment  FAS  data set     Parameters    lt Fdss gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  FAS Data Set  on page 35                           SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig FLAA  lt FasVt gt     Sets the value of the broadcast lateral alert limit     GBAS Settings    Parameters     FasVt   float  Range  0 to 50 8  Increment  0 2   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See  FAS Lateral Alert Limit   Approach Status       page 39                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig FRCLink  lt          gt   Sets the FAS RPDS or continuation link     Parameters    lt          gt                              0    255   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See  FAS RPDS or Continuation Link       page 41                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig FVAA  lt Fvaa gt     Sets the value of the broadcas
25.         85                                    86   iet                       87  Trigger delay   g   cce                                     89   ILS           89   VOR q                      E 89  Trigger paramelels         etico ci a eie          26  Trigger Marker   a  c                         48  64  71                              48  64 71   VOR M           48  64  71  U  Up frequency   JES  Glide  Slope             pn eite 51  Up Down phase   IES Glide Slope         e 51  V  VAR depth   VOR EE 66  VAR REF frequency          wes                                      66           State Settings ioter           28  VDB  power per TS                     nent        30  VHF Data Broadcast transmitter   State Setting      eo reet              28        Waveform file   Greate asure                                 N 25  Waypoint flle    err rm n nein 40    WGS84 coordinates  Delta FRAP ui teet             38  LTP FTP 52  Reference  location             33       
26.         rei                      90  Input source   DME                                                       74  Insert new VDB transmitter                                                 29  InstallatiODi                            11  ej 204    L    Landing systems                    M                     Landing Threshold Point Fictitious Threshold Point  Latitude       Delta                                38                                           37   Reference location             33  Left frequency   IES                         55  Left Right phase                               55  Letter length   IES                                       59  Letter space   DME Modulation                   82       Local magnetic variation                e rre 32  Longitude  Delta                                      e ert teta      dn 38  LH cz   RD                                        37  Reference                                        33  LTP FTP height es  LTP FTP location configuration                                           37  M                Marker delay   DME                            O 93  94  Marker depth   ILS                                   rette otn e eerie 60  Marker frequency   IES Marker Beacotis     ucc c eerte oni erede 60  Marker mode   DME                                                 92  Marker width   lp                             PM     Master slave mode 5  Measured external clock    un co nr entree          95  Measurement count   PME an AlySIS  
27.        5                             189   5  0         lt      gt                                               lt      gt                                                                                     189   SOURceshw   BB GBAS TRIGGER RMODSO        ern tme nee en eti ey eb                                            184    SOURceshw   BB GBAS TRIGger SLENGgth       rettet tcr tn een teh eran 184    SOURceshw  BB GBAS TRIGger SLUNIL         etna re nr                               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger SOURce                  lt       gt        6    5                                  lt      gt                     185                 lt       gt        6    5                                     lt      gt                 2             186   ESOURce lt hw gt   BB GBASWVDBIARREING                                                                          116    SOURceshw   BB GBAS VDB  Ch    DATA    ettet rente ne reb          118    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   DATA DSELection                                                     118    SOURce lt hw gt   BB  GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DATA PAT TEM arsenate ose anaE ATENENT 119    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DELete      SOURceshw  BB GBAS VDBch   DEENglth                                    tht rn          118  5098                                       gt                                      omne reiner inn uae y xu          ere          118    SOURceshw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   GID      cr tenor ttr t trt teh ne 
28.       SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  FNUMber  lt FNum gt     Sets the frequency number the corresponding VDB is using     Parameters    lt FNum gt  integer  Range   5 to 5   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See            Num  on page 28         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DLENgth  lt DataLen gt   Sets the application data length     Parameters     lt DataLen gt  integer  Range  1 to 65495   RST  222    Manual operation  See  App  Data Length bytes  on page 29         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DATA  lt Data gt     Selects the data source  e g  a sequence of    or 1  a pseudo random sequence with  different lenght  a pattern or a data list  DLISt      Parameters     lt Data gt  ZERO   ONE   PATTern            PN11   PN15   PN16       20    PN21   PN23   DLISt   RGData   RST  PN9   Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Data Data Config  on page 28         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DATA DSELection  lt DSelection gt     Selects the data list for the data source     Parameters    lt DSelection gt  string  Example  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 DATA DLISt                SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB2  DATA  DSELection    var user gbas dl dm iqd               Manual operation  See  Data Data Config  on page 28    GBAS Settings            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DATA PATTer
29.      5            lt      gt                              gt                2                188   2500      lt      gt                                 gt   WIDTH                                     188    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MODB                           e tea t Pede c        164    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB DME PINPUUD EL ays              dae tek a un ke Re Lege 171                          ESOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPUESOW                                                    mance    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPut TRIGger LEVel                   lt       gt                                             5             202                                     172               BB DME PRS                                      HR   ESOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PPS                       SOURceshw   BB DME PRESS Lt         nre                                                                                                                                                                     SOURceshw   BB DME RATE       err tr tre nett                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME RDIStance       SOURceshws  BB DME RDIStanee                                       169   SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME RISES          169    SOURceshw   BB DME SET Ting CATalog               rtt rnt tenente th trt erret            108    SOURceshwslBB DME SETTirig DEbel  e                                                                 n                lt      gt                           LOAD     
30.      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CSUFfix  lt CSuffix gt     Sets the channel that is simulated  Standard compliant X and Y channels differ in the  spacing between the two pulses of the pulse pair and the delay of the ground station     Parameters    lt CSuffix gt  X   Y   ICAO     RST  X    Manual operation  See  Channel Mode  on page 72                     SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME EFFiciency   Efficiency     Sets the relation between reply pulse pairs and received trigger signals  e g  with a set  efficiency of 50  only every second trigger event leads to the generation of a reply  pulse pair     Parameters     lt Efficiency gt  integer  Range  O to 100   RST  100                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME FALL   Fall    Sets the fall time of the pulse  90  to 10  of peak voltage      DME Settings    Parameters    lt Fall gt  float    Range  0 5E 6 to 20E 6  Increment  10E 9   RST  2E 6    Manual operation  See  Pulse Fall  on page 76      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME FREQuency  lt CarreierFreq gt   Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Parameters    lt CarreierFreq gt  float    Range  100E3 to 6E9  Increment  0 01   RST  1025E6    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency  on page 73      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ICAO CHANnel   Channel      Sets the ICAO channel i e        DME transmitting frequency  The RFfrequency is set to  the value selected here     Avionics Standards Remote Control Commands                   See eee eee ee ee    Parameters     lt Channel gt  CH1X   CH1Y
31.      Sets the length of a symbol space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid SYMBol on          147       Dash Length  Available only for  Time Schema  gt  User      Sets the length of a Morse dash in milliseconds     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid  DASH on page 145       Letter Space  Available only for  Time Schema  gt  User      Sets the length of a letter space in milliseconds     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid LETTer               146       System Configuration Settings Marker Beacons    5 4 System Configuration Settings Marker Beacons    To access this dialog   1  Select  ILS  gt  ILS Component  gt  Marker Beacons      2  Select  System Configuration      5 4 1 Signal Settings    This section covers the different signal settings available for the marker beacons mod   ulation     User Defined       75 000 000 000  MHz        0    I       Carrier Frequency Mode  Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal      User Defined  Activates user defined variation of the carrier frequency      Predefined  Activates variation in predefined steps according to the standardized  ILS transmitting frequencies      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  MBEacon                       MODE      page 155    Carrier Frequency  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  User Defined      Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Remote command     SOURce lt hw g
32.      access this dialog select  Baseband Block  gt  VOR      This section contains information about the VOR configuration settings     61 General Settings    This dialog provides access to the general settings of the VOR standard        Changing a parameter in the VOR standard will cause an instant signal change in the  R amp S SMBV without a measurement cylcle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband  signal in order to set the correct RF level  If the standard is switched ON for the first  time  or after every subsequent ON OFF sequence  the measurement cycle will take  place to determine the correct RF level  Every subsequent parameter change in the  VOR standard will be performed without another measurement cycle in order to pro   vide a continous signal output     State  Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modu   lation modes in the same path     Remote command    lt subsystem gt  STATe      page 108    Set To Default  Calls the default settings  The values of the main parameters are listed in chapter A 3    Default Settings   on page 199     Remote command    lt subsystem gt   PRESet      page 108    Save Recall   Accesses the  Save Recall  dialog  i e  the standard instrument function for storing and  recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file  The provided navigation possibil   ities in the dialog are self explanatory     General Settings    The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definab
33.      gt                                186    SOURceshw   BB DME WIDTh      prt rtr        rrr ette rrr      172    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB DME   TRIGger  SEQhuence           retener euet teneri        186    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLIPping LEVel      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB GBAS  CLIPPING  MODE         tnnt trt en tet tnr i reete en            138    SOURceshw    BB GBAS CLIPping S TAT Erissa rainen EN e SENET            137   ESOURceshw gt   BB  GBAS  CEO CKIMOD Erase                                                               191   50         lt       gt                                                                     191    SOURce lt hw   BB  GBAS  CLOCK SOURCC iis                                                                                 192                 lt       gt               5                                                               avanoa 192                 lt       gt              5                                                                 193                 lt       gt                                                      25            0             136   500       lt      gt              5                                              2           136   500       lt      gt              5                                                       5                136    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter GAUSs     5           lt       gt                                                       5                                    lt       g
34.      lt      gt                                                                              1       4  0066                                          173    5           lt      gt                                                                        1  0 0 0000      173    5           lt      gt                                                                           1   1 141 200006                                  173                lt        gt                           5                              sees 174    5           lt      gt                          15                                       nennen nennen 174   SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis NORMalize                     ccs 174   SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis POWer                  cessent 175    SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis POWer OK                  esses 175   SOURce  shw    BB DME ANALysis PRRate                 enisi eesieieis      175    SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis PRRate OK                  sse 176    5           lt      gt                          15                                                      176    SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis STATe                      rennen nnns 176                     gt                                                 224              ai      176    5           lt      gt                                                                  0 4   00 404040 a a aai 177    5           lt      gt                                                5                                    4   
35.     19X   108 20 47     111 00 76X 112 90 90X   19     108 25 47Y   111 05 76Y 112 95 90     21X  108 40 49   111 20 77X 113 00 91X   21     108 45 49Y 111 25 777 113 05 91     23X   108 60 51X   111 40 78X 113 10 92     237   108 65 51   111 45 787 113 15 927   25     108 80 53     111 60 79X 113 20 93X   25Y   108 85 53Y   111 65 79   113 25 93     27X   109 00 55   111 80 80X 113 30 94     27Y   109 05 55Y   111 85 80Y 113 35 94Y   29X   109 20 57X 112 00 81X 113 40 95X   29     109 25 57   112 05 81   113 45 95     31X   109 40 58     112 10 82X 113 50 96X   31Y   109 45 58Y   112 15 82Y 113 55 96Y   33X   109 60 59X 112 20 83X 113 60 97X   33Y   109 65 59Y   112 25 83Y 113 65 97Y   35X   109 80 70X 112 30 84X 113 70 98X   35Y   109 85 70Y 112 35 84Y 113 75 98Y   37X   110 00 71     112 40 85   113 80 99X   37Y   110 05 71Y 112 45 85Y 113 85 99Y   39X   110 20 72X   112 50 86X 113 90 100X   39Y   110 25 727   112 55 86Y 113 95 100Y   41X  110 40 73X 112 60 87Y 114 00 101     115 40 115   116 80  417   110 45 737 112 65 877 114 05 101    115 45 115Y 116 85  43X   110 60 74   112 70 88X 114 10 102     115 50 116   116 90  4       110 65 74   112 75 88   114 15 1027   115 55 116Y 116 95                                              2 3 DME Channel Frequencies    The individual values in the table are     Ch  No    ICAO channel number   VOR Freq    VOR interrogation frequency   DME Interrog  Freq    DME interrogation frequency  MHz   DME Reply Freq    DME reply frequency  MHz 
36.     BB  ILS  TRIGger ARM EXECute on          182      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 182    SOURce  hw      BB  DME  TRIGger  ARM  EXECute on page 182                      Clock     Accesses the dialog for selecting the clock source  see chapter 8 4   Clock Settings    on page 94     System Configuration Settings    6 2 System Configuration Settings    6 2 1       To access this dialog        Select  VOR  gt  System Configuration      Signal Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the VOR modulation signal     User Defined Si  108 000 000 000  MHz        30 0   7  9 960 Q0  kHz      30 0        480 Hz 7    Carrier Frequency Mode  Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal      User Defined  Activates user defined variation of the carrier frequency      ICAO  Activates variation in predefined steps according to the standardized  VOR transmitting frequencies  see chapter A 2 2   VOR Channel Fre   quencies    on page 195   The start value can be selected in the field   ICAO Channel      Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB VOR FREQuency           on page 158    Carrier Frequency  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  User Defined      Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  FREQuency               158          ICAO Channel  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  ICAO      Selects the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting fre
37.     BB ILS LOCalizer PHASe      page 151       Amplitude Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the ILS LOC amplitude     System Configuration Settings Localizer    0 000 0  0 000 O dB     0 00    7    Fixed DDM       Sum of Depth   Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the left lobe  90Hz  and right lobe   150Hz  ILS LOC signal contents  The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal  depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones  The sum of  Sum of Depth   on page 56 and  Depth  on page 59 must be smaller than 100 PCT     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer  SDM      page 152       Fly   Selects the simulation mode for the ILS LOC modulation signal  A change of the set    ting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value    This setting simulates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course     Left  The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is neg   ative  the airplane is too far to the right  it must turn to the left      Right  The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is posi   tive  the airplane is too far to the left  it must turn to the right      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer DDM  DIRection      page 148       DDM Step   Selects the variation of the DDM values     Decimal  Decimal variation according to the current cursor position     Predifined  Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized DDM val   ues     Re
38.     GNSS reference receivers  number                                                      Ground station          Accuracy desigrialor               eerte   Continuity integrity designator         Reference                              trennt  e       Ground station accuracy designator                                   32  Ground station continuity integrity designator                     32    Ground station reference receivers          jer  pM  GSBR nde de lee               H  jo                          32  Header byte  LAAS  GBAS               25  SCAT                        25      ICAO channel  WS          P         50       Eoee AE E E E A 54  WOR                                       65  ICAO Channel  DME                   coii             73  ID code  DME reply            81  DME  reply  Mode  c ohne troi patri i rst them rts 81  ID dash length  DME reply MOG  n          teer ttn neas 82  ID frequency  DME modulatlorni       eii obiret            eom 81  DME reply          niai         81  ID letter space  DME reply          chi rt ia b tii             cota 82  ID period                               de terii            81  DME reply Mode            81  ID state  DME reply                                         80  DME reply MOG                80    ID symbol space  DME modulation  DME reply mode   ID time schema       DME modulation                       81   DME reply mode                81  IES COMPON SM                                   48  Inhibit              
39.     Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 196    Avionics Standards Annex     eee eee eee ee ere    Table 1 4  Standardized DME transmitting frequencies  MHz  and the associated ICAO channels for interrogation and reply                                                             Ch  VOR DME DME    Ch  VOR DME DME Ch  VOR DME DME  No  Freq    Interrog  Reply    No  Freq    Interrog   Reply No  Freq    Interrog  Reply  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq    1X 1025 962    43X 110 60 1067 1004 85   113 80 1109 1172  1Y 1025 1088    43Y 110 65 1067 1130 85Y 113 85 1109 1046  2X 1026 963    44X 110 70 1068 1005 86X 113 90 1110 1173  2Y 1026 1089    44Y 110 75 1068 1131 867 113 95 1110 1047  3X 1027 964    45   110 80 1069 1106 87   114 00 1111 1174       1027 1090    45   110 85 1069 1132 877 114 05 1111 1048  4X 1028 965    46X 110 90 1070 1007 88X 114 10 1112 1175  4Y 1028 1091    46Y 110 95 1070 1133 88Y 114 15 1112 1049  5X 1029 966    47X 111 00 1071 1008 89X 114 20 1113 1176  5Y 1029 1092    47Y 111 05 1071 1134 89Y 114 25 1113 1050  6X 1030 967    48   111 10 1072 1009 90X 114 30 1114 1177  6Y 1030 1093    48Y 111 15 1072 1135 90   114 35 1114 1051  7X 1031 968    49X 111 20 1073 1010 91X 114 40 1115 1178       1031 1094    497 111 25 1073 1136 91   114 45 1115 1052  8X 1032 969    50X 111 30 1074 1011 92X 114 50 1116 1179  8Y 1032 1095    50Y 111 35 1074 1137 927 114 55 1116 1053  9   1033 970    51   111 40 1075 1012 93X 114 60 1117 1180  9Y 1033 1096    51Y 111 45 1075 113
40.     SOURce1 BB GBAS GPOW       SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS1 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS1 POWer 0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS3 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS3 POWer  15  SOURce1 BB GBAS STATe       OUTputl STATe ON                GBAS Settings       vary  reduce  the relative power of TS3  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS3 POWer  45    Example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection    The following is an example on how to configure transmission of two VDBs on a com   mon carrier frequency of 100 MHz  VDB 1 and VDB 2 use different time slots      RST  SOURcel FREQuency CW 110MHz    SOURCe1 BB GBAS MFCHannels OFF     enable 2 VDBs  SOURce1 BB GBAS   SOURce1 BB GBAS   SOURce1 BB GBAS     VDB APPend  VDB1 SCH TS1 STATe ON  VDB1 SCH TS1 POWer 0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS8 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 SCH TS8 POWer 0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS2 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS2 POWer 0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS5 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS5 POWer 0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS7 STATe ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 SCH TS7 POWer 0                      SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB2 STATe      Response  1  SOURce1 BB GBAS STATe       OUTputl STATe ON                generate a waveform and store it in the default directory  SOURce1 BB GBAS WAVeform CREate           slot detection       store the settings in a file in the default directory  SOURce1 BB GBAS SETTing STORe  FAST       Respone  1       SOURce1 BB GBAS SETTing STORe  gbas slot detection     Exa
41.     ta test mete en EN      78  Measurement count  analysis   DME                         o rec irt tir re eet Oe Rex oat 78  Message configuration        E 30  Message                                                              204  Message type 2 State                     31  Message type 2  4                           a                30  Message type 4              GN                                34  Minimum signal in space                                                      32             IS Glide  SIO DO               50   ILS Localizer ips   VOR            Modulation ty De                                                 Multiple frequnecy   Advantages                        15  MUI ONG       D TEE 95      INR mw 32  Normalize setup   DME                                          83  Normalize setup  analysis   DME                            Number of frames                 Number of pathpoints            INyquist filler       tet ee i                                     P  Pair of pulse pairs   DME                                     80  Peak level   DME           5  15  nter hr ere nere 78  Peak level  analysis   DME interrogatio       2 erre nne 78    Period   ILS Localizer                ILS Marker Beacons m          T               Position Format   Delta FPAP                                            Reference location    sie                 edente recen          Pulse fall   DME  2 2 bnt t er de 76  Pulse pair spacing tolerance   DMB ea Ud e e 76  Pulse repet
42.    BB DME STATe   State   Activate deactivate DME modulation     Parameters     State   0 1                      5    0      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PRESet  Sets the DME default settings       SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MODE   Mode      Selects the mode of the DME modulation  The mode determines the signal type that is  simulated  The exact timing of the signal for each mode is determined by the channel  selected with     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  CSUFfix     Parameters     lt Mode gt  INTerrogation   REPLy  INTerrogation  The interrogation signal of the airborne transmitter is simulated   REPLy  The reply signal of the ground based transponder is simulated   The trigger is automatically set to external and the default trigger  delay either to 50 us  channel X  or 56 us  channel Y  depending  on the selected channel       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  CSUFfix    The interval between the pulse pairs can be set to a fixed value   repetition rate      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME   RATE  or to random  generation  pulse squitter      SOURce  hw      BB  DME   SQUitter  The trigger signal is input via the PULSE EXT con   nector      RST  INTerrogation          Manual operation  See  DME Mode  on page 71    DME Settings    10 5 2 DME System Configuration Settings     PSOURCe lt hw gt  BBD ME                                                                   165  ESOURce lt hw gt  BBDMEIEFPICIENCY                                165                                    ucc iota tore    
43.    BB ILS MBEacon  COMA  LETTE srpa aeara    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS MBEacon  COMIG PERIOG  ia                                                                SOURce  hw   BB ILS MBEacon COMid SYMBoOl                    essen nennen    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid TSCHema          SOURce  shw  BB IES MBEacon COMIG  S TATE  siririna                         ESOURce lt hw   BBiILS  MBE ACOn  FRE QUENCY iriran                                                                                                                                   SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon FREQuency MODE    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon MARKer FREQuency                                  SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon   MARKer  DEPTh                  estt   5  0       lt      gt           5                                                                                                               5  0       lt      gt        1 5                                                                                                                  5  0       lt      gt           58 5                                                                               108   SOURce  hw    BB ILS SETTing DELete                 stet totis 109            SOURCeshw  EBB IES SET Eng EORD           t ttc rh            epit trennen ree chi                        109    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing STORe     109    SOURceshw   E BB IES SETTing STORS  FAST    cies eite rct reete btt denter        ice 110     
44.    CH2X   CH2Y   CH3X   CH3Y   CH4X   CH4Y    CH5X   CH5Y       6     CH6Y   CH7X   CH7Y   CH8X   CH8Y    CH9X   CH9Y   CH10X   CH10Y   CH11X   CH11Y   CH12X    CH12Y   CH13X   CH13Y   CH14X   CH14Y   CH15X   CH15Y    CH16X   CH16Y   CH17X   CH17Y   CH18X   CH18Y   CH19X    CH19Y   CH20X   CH20Y   CH21X   CH21Y   CH22X   CH22Y    CH23X   CH23Y   CH24X   CH24Y   CH25X   CH25Y   CH26X    CH26Y   CH27X   CH27Y   CH28X   CH28Y   CH29X   CH29Y    CH30X   CH30Y   CH31X   CH31Y   CH32X   CH32Y   CH33X    CH33Y   CH34X   CH34Y   CH35X   CH35Y   CH36X   CH36Y    CH37X   CH37Y   CH38X   CH38Y   CH39X   CH39Y       40                   CH41X   CH41Y   CH42X   CH42Y                              CH44X   CH44Y   CH45X   CH45Y   CH46X   CH46Y                 CH47Y   CH48X   CH48Y   CH49X   CH49Y   CH50X   CH50Y        51     CH51Y   CH52X   CH52Y   CH53X   CH53Y   CH54X    CH54Y   CH55X   CH55Y   CH56X   CH56Y   CH57X   CH57Y    CH58X   CH58Y   CH59X   CH59Y   CH60X   CH60Y   CH61X    CH61Y   CH62X   CH62Y   CH63X   CH63Y   CH64X   CH64Y    CH65X   CH65Y   CH66X   CH66Y   CH67X   CH67Y   CH68X    CH68Y   CH69X   CH69Y   CH70X   CH70Y   CH71X   CH71Y    CH72X   CH72Y   CH73X   CH73Y   CH74X   CH74Y   CH75X    CH75Y   CH76X   CH76Y   CH77X   CH77Y   CH78X   CH78Y    CH79X   CH79Y   CH80X   CH80Y   CH81X   CH81Y   CH82X    CH82Y   CH83X   CH83Y   CH84X   CH84Y   CH85X   CH85Y    CH86X   CH86Y   CH87X   CH87Y   CH88X   CH88Y   CH89X    CH89Y   CH90X   CH90Y   CH91X   CH91Y   CH92X   CH92Y    CH
45.    The R amp S SMBV K111 option enables you to define and configure the very high fre   quency  VHF  Data Broadcast  VDB  Signal in Space transmitted from the Ground  Based Augmentation System  GBAS  ground subsystem to the airbone subsystem   This implementation is in line with the specification RTCA DO 246D  The instrument  generates the GBAS signal at the physical layer and includes configuration of the  application data     The GBAS is a ground based augmentation system that could among other things  enhance satellite navigation to provide a position estimation of less than one meter   The GBAS is intended to improve aircraft safety and to enhance satellite navigation  and the full range of precision approach and landing procedures  as well as the termi   nal area operations  GBAS could replace the Instrument Landing System  ILS  and the  Microwave Landing System  MLS  in many applications     GBAS components    The illustration on figure 3 1 is a simplified representation of the GBAS three main  components     e the GNSS satellite subsystem    Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 13              Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS     e the airborne subsystem     the GBAS ground subsystem     The ground equipment consists of four reference GNSS receivers at exactly defined  positions around the airport  GBAS ground station  and a VHF data broadcast transmit   ter  VDB           GNSS Satellites           9  v Glonass        AS                   GBAS  Reference        V
46.    The localizer transmitter is located near the end of the runway  nearest to the start of  the aircraft approach   Typically  horizontally aligned antennas transmit two intersecting  main beams beside one another at carrier frequencies between 108 MHz and 112  MHz  As seen from the approaching aircraft coming in for a landing  the left beam is  usually modulated at 90 Hz and the right beam at 150 Hz  1MA193     The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by eval   uating the difference in depth of modulation  DDM   The following scenarios are possi     ble      Predominance of the 90 Hz beam  the aircraft is too far to the left and must turn to  the right      Predominance of the 150 Hz beam  the aircraft is too far to the right and must turn  to the left      The singal strength from both beams is equal  the aircraft is in the center  on the  right course        Marker Beacons    Marker beacon  MB  receivers are used for a rough distance measurement  They are  available only for some ILS installations  1MA 193     3 3    VHF Omni Directional Radio Range  VOR     75 m to 450 m  Ideal  7 2 km    Operational      6 5 km to 11 1 km              Runway  centerline           Inner  marker  3000 Hz              Middle   marker  1300 Hz       threshold        lt 30m        Fig  3 5  Marker beacon placement with respect to runway    Marker beacon receivers decode audio and provide signaling output to identify one of  three marker beacons installed
47.   0 1                 RST  0  Example  SOURCe1 BB GBAS SCATi 0    Manual operation  See                            25      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS MFCHannels  lt MFCh gt   Enables the configuration of multiple frequency channels     Parameters    lt MFCh gt  0 1 OFF ON     RST  0    GBAS Settings    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111    Manual operation  See  Multiple Frequency Channels  on page 26                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS GPOW  lt GPow gt     Enables gated power mode     Parameters     lt GPow gt  0 1                        1   Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for sensitivity tests   on page 110    Manual operation  See  Gated Power Mode  on page 26               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SRINfo   Queries the used sample rate     Return values    lt SRInfo gt  string    Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation  settings  on page 114    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Sample Rate Variation Sample Rate Info  on page 26    10 2 3 VDB Transmission Configuration Settings               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB APPend  Appends a new VDB to the end of the VDB list     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111  Usage  Event    Manual operation  See  Append  Insert  Delete  on page 29      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  INSert    Inserts a new VDB before the selected one     Example  see example  Generat
48.   0 15 2 5 0 01 2   Parameters     lt SPhase gt  float    Range  0 15 to 2 5  Increment  0 01   RST  2    Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation  settings  on page 114    Manual operation  See  Roll Off Factor or         on page 43      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLIPping STATe   State    Enables disable clipping     Parameters     State   0 1  OFF          RST  0  Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation    settings  on page 114    Manual operation  See  Clipping State  on page 45      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLIPping LEVel  lt Level gt   Sets the limit for clipping     Parameters     lt Level gt  integer  Range  1 to 100   RST  100    GBAS Settings    Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation  settings  on page 114    Manual operation  See  Clipping Level  on page 46      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLIPping  MODE   Mode    Sets the clipping mode     Parameters     Mode   VECTor   SCALar   RST  VECTor  Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation    settings  on page 114  Manual operation  See  Clipping Mode  on page 46      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS MSET MTYPe   Queries the used modulation     Return values      lt MType gt  string   RST  D8PSK  Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation    settings  on page 114  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Modulation Type  on page 45      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS MS
49.   10 3 3    ILS Settings    Parameters     lt Phase gt  float  Range   60 to 120  Increment  0 01   RST  0 0    Manual operation  See  Up Down Phase  on page 51            SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  SDM  lt Sdm gt     Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the upper lobe  90Hz  and lower  lobe  150  2  for the ILS GS signal contents  The RMS modulation depth of the sum  signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones     Parameters    lt Sdm gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  80    Manual operation  See  Sum of Depth  SDM   on page 52            SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  ULOBe  FREQuency    Frequency   Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the top viewed from the  air plane  up frequency      Parameters     Frequency   float    Range  60 to 120  Increment  0 03   RST  90    Manual operation  See  Up Frequency  on page 51    ILS Localizer Settings      SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  COMid CODE                   eese 145   SOURce  shw   BB ILS LOCalizer  COMid DASH                   211    etie                   145    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer                                          1 1100    0        145   500       lt      gt        5                                                                                       146    5           lt      gt       1151                                                                 2    141 1                                             146    
50.   38  Delta                                  39  Depth   IESHLOCAIIZOR           59   ILS Marker Beacons           61   VOR Wt 68  Depth of modulation polarity   IES Glide Slope               50  Differential GNSS                                            30                       42                                                             67                          DME                rtr ertet te ten 76  Pulse Pair Spacing Tolerance                          mr trenes  Pulse shap  e     xcti        Pulse spacing     Pulse width         eingle pulse                    DME analysis                               rrr erret  Expected reply delay       Gate                       Measurement count     X  Normialize setup     intere  Peak level    nhe ere tice       Pulse repetition frequency        79  Range distance                         78  Reply delay           79                                 e p                       79  State                                   77  DME interrogation  Expected reply delay  analysis                                     78  Gate length  analysis    retener 78  Measurement count  analysis      78  Normalize setup  analysis             63  Peak level  analysis                               176  Pulse repetition frequency  analysis      79  Pulse repetition             neret 74  Pulse repetition rate trigger                                           74  Range distance                         78  Repetition rate                    74  Repetition
51.   BB VOR COMid SYMBol   Symbol         Sets the length of the symbol space in seconds        Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid TSCHema is set to USER   Parameters     Symbol   float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Symbol Space  on page 69         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid TSCHema  lt Tschema gt   Sets the time schema        the COM ID signal     In the standard time schema  STD  the set dot length determines the dash length     three times the dot length  whereas in the user time schema  USER  all length param   eters can be set independently     Parameters    lt                gt  STD   USER     RST  STD    Manual operation  See  Time Schema  on page 68         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid  STATe    State   Switches on  off the addittional COM ID signal     Parameters     State   0 1  OFF  ON     RST  0    Manual operation  See  State  on page 67    DME Settings    10 5 DME Settings    10 5 1          The BB  DME subsystem contains all commands for configuring a DME signal     See also chapter 10 6   Trigger Settings    on page 181 and chapter 10 9   Clock Set   tings   on page 191 for a description of the trigger and clock settings     DME General Settings    LSOURceshw   BB DOMES TANG cuia              eas 164   SOURcexshw  EBBIDME PRESet           1  2 2                  164  ESOURCe  hw  TBBIDME            eerta      tun trance ra nonni Re                                      164      SOURce lt hw gt
52.   CH58X   CH58Y   CH59X   CH59Y   CH70X   CH70Y   CH71X    CH71Y   CH72X   CH72Y   CH73X   CH73Y   CH74X   CH74Y    CH75X   CH75Y   CH76X   CH76Y   CH77X   CH77Y   CH78X    CH78Y   CH79X   CH79Y   CH80X   CH80Y   CH81X   CH81Y        82     CH82Y   CH83X   CH83Y   CH84X   CH84Y       85      CH85Y   CH86X   CH86Y   CH87X   CH87Y   CH88X   CH88Y    CH89X   CH89Y   CH90X   CH90Y   CH91X   CH91Y   CH92X    CH92Y   CH93X   CH93Y   CH94X   CH94Y   CH95X   CH95Y    CH96X   CH96Y   CH97X   CH97Y   CH98X   CH98Y   CH99X    CH99Y       100     CH100Y   CH101X   CH101Y   CH102X    CH102Y   CH103X   CH103Y   CH104X   CH104Y   CH105X    CH105Y   CH106X   CH106Y   CH107X   CH107Y   CH108X    CH108Y   CH109X   CH109Y   CH110X   CH110Y       111      CH111Y   CH112X   CH112Y   CH113X   CH113Y   CH114X    CH114Y   CH115X   CH115Y   CH116X   CH116Y   CH117X    CH117Y   CH118X   CH118Y   CH119X   CH119Y   CH120X    CH120Y   CH121X   CH121Y   CH122X   CH122Y   CH123X    CH123Y   CH124X   CH124Y   CH125X   CH125Y   CH126X    CH126Y     RST  CH17X  See  ICAO Channel  on page 65      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR REFerence  DEViation    Deviation     Sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier     Parameters     Deviation      integer  Range  0 to 960   RST  480    Default unit  Hz      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SUBCarrier DEPTh   Depth     Sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier     Parameters     Depth      float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  30    VOR Set
53.   Depth     Sets the AM modulation depth of the of the COM ID signal     Parameters    lt Depth gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  10    Manual operation  See  Depth  on page 59    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid DOT   Dot      Sets the length of a morse dot in seconds  If the time schema is set to STD the length  of the dash  3xdot   symbol space   dot  and letter space   3xdot  is also determined  by this entry     Parameters    lt Dot gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Dot Length  on page 59         SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid FREQuency   Frequency   Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Parameters     Frequency  float    Range  0 1 to 20E3  Increment  0 01   RST  1020    Manual operation  See  Frequency       page 58      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid LETTer   Letter   Sets the length of a letter space in seconds     Available only if     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  LOCalizer COMid TSCHema is set to  USER        Parameters     Letter  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Letter Space  on page 59      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid PERiod   Period    Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Parameters     Period   float    Range  0 to 120  Increment  1E 3   RST  9    Manual operation  See  Period  on page 59    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid SYMBol   Symbol    Set
54.   Marker Beacon modulation                                     62  69  Continuation  Wink                      41  Conventions          commands    eem cer      106  Course width at threshold                                                   39  Crest factor                         dia          45  Current Range without Recalculation      a  91  Cut Off Frequency Factor                            44  Cut      Frequency Shift       44  D  Dash length   DME Modulation                 82   ILS Localizer                  59  Data list management          D  ta SOUCO RE 28  DDM   SDM coupling   IES  Glide Slope    orte rtr ee aR 53   IES LEOC  IIZOF     iet orb raa rnnt tentes 57  DDM current   IES  GIUS SIOPE                      52   WES LOCANIZOR s 56  DDM depth   IES         516                            52   IES LOCAIIZOR REO 57  DDM logarithmic   IES Glide Slope               53   IES                                          57  DDM percent                                               53   IES LOCAIIZOR        57  DDM polarity      TOCA     54  DDM step   IES Glide SIO PO           52   IES E oCc  aliZer      tette iere ra                              56  Default settings                                             24  47  63  70  Delay   Marker                                                                 91  Delay  external trigger   DME modulation                         Delete    VDB transmitter     Delta_FPAP location configuration                                   
55.   SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce  hw        SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt          B GBAS  TRIGger   SEQuence      page 186  B ILS  TRIGger   SEQuence on page 186  B  VOR   TRIGger  SEQuence on          186                      BB DME  TRIGger   SEQuence               186       Signal Duration Unit  Available only for R amp S SMBV K111  GBAS  option     Defines the unit for describing the length of the signal sequence to be output in the   Single  trigger mode     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS TRIGger SLUNit      page 185    Trigger Signal Duration  Enters the length of the signal sequence to be output in the  Single  trigger mode     Use this parameter to deliberately output part of the signal  an exact sequence of the  signal  or a defined number of repetitions of the signal     Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS TRIGger SLENgth on page 184     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger SLENgth on page 185     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  TRIGger  SLENgth on page 185     SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME  TRIGger  SLENgth on page 184                Arm  For trigger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed                      stops the signal generation  until subsequent trigger event occurs     Remote command                                     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger ARM EXECute               182      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  TRIGger ARM EXECute on          182      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  TRIGger  ARM  EXECute on          182      SOURce lt 
56.   STATe                179             Pulse Pair Spacing  Sets the value for the pulse pair spacing when  Pair of Pulse Pairs  is enabled     Remote command       SOURCe lt hw gt     BB  DME  ID  PPS on page 180             Code   Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport   If no coding is entered  the COM ID tone is sent  uncoded  key down      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  ID  CODE on          178                Rate  Sets the pulse repetition rate of the ID sequence     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB           ID  RATE on page 180                Period  Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Remote command      SOURce  hw       BB  DME  ID  PERiod on page 180                   Time Schema  Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     e  Standard   The set dot length determines the length of the dash  the symbol space and letter  Space       User     You can set each length value seperately     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  ID  TSCHema      page 181             Dot Length  Sets the length of a Morse dot in seconds     7 2 6    System Configuration Settings    For  Time Schema  gt  Standard  this value determines also the length of the dash   3xDot length   symbol space    Dot length  and letter space  3xDot length      Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  ID  DOT      page 179             Dash Length  Available only for  Time Schema    U
57.   The most important R amp S SMBV K151 features at a glance      Generation of glide slope  localizer and marker beacons signals      Configuration of user definable carrier frequencies or selection of carrier frequen   cies as defined by ICAO        Adjustable COM ID settings     The VOR Option    The R amp S SMBV K152 is a firmware application that adds functionality to generate sig   nals in accordance with the VHF Omni Directional Radio Range radio navigation sys     2 1    Accessing the Avionics Dialog    tem  It is used to determine the aircraft position by receiving radio signals from a net   work of ground beacons   The most important R amp S SMBV K152 features at a glance        Configuration of user definable carrier frequencies or selection of carrier frequen   cies as defined by ICAO     e User defined position settings      Adjustable COM ID settings     The DME Option    The R amp S SMBV K153 is a firmware application that adds functionality to generate sig   nals in accordance with the distance measuring equipment  DME  for aircraft  It is used  to measure the slant range distance between the vessel and a fixed ground based sta   tion    The most important R amp S SMBV K153 features at a glance      Generation of DME interrogation and reply signals       Configuration of user definable carrier frequencies or selection of carrier frequen   cies as defined by ICAO        Adjustable COM ID settings     This operating manual contains a description of the functional
58.   Usage  Event    Manual operation  See  Set Synchronization Settings  on page 95      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CLOCk SYNChronization  MODE  lt Mode gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCk SYNChronization  MODE  lt          gt      SOURce  hw   BB ILS  CLOCk SYNChronization  MODE   Mode     SOURce  hw     BB VOR CLOCk SYNChronization MODE   Mode     Selects the synchronization mode     This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of sev   eral connected R amp S SMBVs     Note  If several instruments are connected  the connecting cables from the master  instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must  have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points     Parameters      Mode  NONE   MASTer   SLAVe  NONE  The instrument is working in stand alone mode   MASTer    The instrument provides all connected instrument with its syn   chronization  including the trigger signal  and reference clock  signal    SLAVe   The instrument receives the synchronization and reference clock  signal from another instrument working in a master mode      RST  NONE    Manual operation  See  Sync  Mode  on page 94    Morse Code Settings    A Annex    A 1 Morse Code Settings    The COMIID tone is sent according to the selected code  see table 1 1   The length of  the Morse code can be varied  For selected standard time scheme  the selected dot  length determines the setting of all other length parameters o
59.   lt FastSave gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing STORe FAST  lt FastSave gt     Determines whether the instrument performs an absolute or a differential storing of the  settings     Enable this function to accelerate the saving process by saving only the settings with  values different to the default ones     Note  This function is not affected by the  Preset  function     Parameters     lt FastSave gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1   GBAS Settings    Programming Examples    This description provides simple programming examples  The purpose of the examples  is to present all commands for a given task  In real applications  one would rather  reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands     The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an  environment for the development and execution of remote tests  To keep the example  as simple as possible  only the  clean  SCPI syntax elements are reported  Non exe   cutable command lines  e g  comments  start with two    characters     At the beginning of the most remote control program  an instrument  p reset is recom   mended to set the instrument to a definite state  The commands  RST and   SYSTem  PRESet are equivalent for this purpose   CLS also resets the status registers  and clears the output buffer        Example  Generating a GBAS signal for sensitivity tests  The following example uses the gated power mode      RST  SOURcel FREQuency CW 108 4MHz  SOURce1 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude  10
60.   on page 73                 SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME RDIStance UNIT   Unit         Sets the unit for the range distance that can be defined with the     SOURce lt hw gt     BB   DME   RDIStance     The distance can be given in nautic miles  NM  or us  1 nm is 1852 01 meters and cor   responds to a run time of 12 359 us     Parameters     Unit   US   NM     RST  NM    Manual operation  See  Range Distance  on page 73                        SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME RISE   Rise         Sets the rise time of the pulse  1096 to 9096 of peak voltage    Parameters     Rise   float    Range  0 5E 6 to 20E 6  Increment  10E 9   RST  2E 6    Manual operation  See  Pulse Rise  on page 76      m m               SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SHAPe  lt Shape gt        Sets the pulse shape     DME Settings    Parameters     lt Shape gt      52   LIN   COS   GAUSs  COS2   The rising edge is cos shaped and the falling edge is cos 2 sha   ped   LIN  The falling and the rising edge of the pulse are shaped linear   COS  The falling and the rising edge of the pulse are cos 2 shaped    RST  COS2    Manual operation  See  Pulse Shape  on page 75       SOURce  hw     BB DME SINGIe   Single   Activates deactivates generation of a single test pulse     Parameters     Single   0 1  OFF            RST  0    Manual operation  See  Single Pulse  on page 76      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SQuitter  lt Squitter gt   Activates deactivates the random pulse repetition rate     The average repetition rate is 2700 pp 
61.   page 108     e Entry Standard   DME  SOURce BB  DME  STATe       Entry Standard   GBAS  SOURce BB GBAS STATe       Entry Standard   ILS  SOURce BB  ILS  STATe       Entry Standard   VOR  SOURce BB VOR STATe                   e invalid command   lt Subsystem gt  STAT             Common Suffixes    The following common suffixes are used in remote commands     10 1    Primary Settings             Suffix Value range Description  SOURce lt hw gt   1  available baseband signals  OUTPut lt ch gt  12 available markers    R amp S SMBV supports two markers       EXTernal lt ch gt  14 2 external trigger connectors                The following commands specific to the Avionics standards are described here        Primary                                  107  e    BAS SUNS                                                     ndi be c dee des 110            Do                           139      VOR           156     DME                                                  164  e  Tigger ette ue cete ctr                 181  e  Marker Settings DME                                 187        Marker Seluhgs GBAS              188  e   lock      rrt cete ttt e n           ceo tgo 191  Primary Settings                                    E                                             108     5           lt     gt                                        enr                           108  2                                  STA UG                           108                       gt                      
62.   quency allocation mode   GBAS  gt  Multiple Frequency Channels   and use the VDB  transmitter configuration settings  see  Freq  Num  on page 28     For step by step instruction  refer to chapter 9 1   Generating GBAS Signals with Sev   eral Frequency Channels   on page 97   Broadcast timing structure    The broadcast is a Time Division Multiple Access  TDMA   According to  1   the TDMA  timing structure uses a two level hierarchy  composed of 500 ms long frames  each  divided into 8 VDB time slots  A   H   see figure 3 2            Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS     500ms  Frames                  E N  8 VDB time slots                                    Tt         _TS8       Fig  3 2  TDMA timing structure  simplified representation     A        time slot is the minimum resource that an individual VDB transmitter can use   During one time slot a VDB transmitter transmits exactly one bursts     The GBAS specification RTCA DO 246D defines the TDMA timing structure  including  timing budget of the VDB bursts  burst data contents and message encoding in great  details  The R amp S SMBV generates the required training sequence  encodes the mes   sage according to RTCA DO 246D and applies the D8PSK modulation automatically   so that you can concentrate on the configuration of the mandatory application data   Optional application data defined in RTCA DO 246D is beyond the scope of this imple   mentation     To allocate the VDB in the time domain  use the scheduling setting
63.  0       SOURce1 BB GBAS STATe       OUTputl STATe         SOURCe1 BB GBAS SETTing STORe  gbas msg fmt detection   SOURce1 BB GBAS SETTing CATalog           Response  gbas msg fmt detection gbas slot detection    Example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message type 4    The following is an example on how to generate a VDB signal with real application data  and enabled GBAS Message Type 4      RST  SOURcel FREQuency CW 110MHz    SOURce1 BB GBAS MFCHannels OFF  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 DATA RGData  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig MT4State         SOURcel1 BB GBAS   SOURcel1 BB GBAS   500      1                 500      1                 500      1                 500      1                 500      1                 500      1                   DB1 MCONfig FDSState ON  DB1 MCONfig GPANgle 30  DB1 MCONfig ATUSelector MET  DB1 MCONfig ATCHeight 1200  DB1 MCONfig LFLocation HEIGht 103  DB1 MCONfig AID           DB1 MCONfig RNUMber 13  DB1 MCONfig RLETter LETL                          lt  4  lt 4       4    GBAS Settings    SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig APDesignator GC  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig RUINdicator        SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig RPDF 3   SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig RPIF  L13A   SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates DECimal  0 012650 0 027897  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates DMS       Response  73 47 13 83 EAST  40  39  22 95  NORT  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates DECimal  0 012650  0 027897  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 M
64.  0    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Pulse Repetition Rate  on page 79    DME Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis PRRate OK     Queries if there are valid pulse repetition measurement values available in the set  measurement window     Return values      lt Ok gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Pulse Repetition Rate  on page 79      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis RDIStance     Queries the measured average range distance of all valid pulse pairs in a measure   ment cycle       Return values    lt RangeDistance gt  float    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Range Distance  on page 78      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis STATe  lt State gt     Activates deactivates the DME analysis  The setting is only available after connecting  the R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  0    Manual operation  See  State  on page 77      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis  TIME     Queries the measured average reply delay of all valid pulse pairs in a measurement    cycle    Return values     lt Time gt  float  Range   1E 3 to 1E 3  Increment  10E 9   RST  0   Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Reply Delay  on page 79    DME Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis TIME OK     Queries if there are valid measurement values available in the set measurement win   dow     Return values    lt Ok gt  0 1 OFF ON    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Reply Delay  on p
65.  05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    VOR Settings         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid DEPTh   Depth     Sets the AM modulation depth of the of the COM ID signal     Parameters    lt Depth gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  10    Manual operation  See  Depth  on page 68         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid DOT   Dot            Sets the length of a morse dot in seconds  If the time schema is set to STD the length  of the dash  3xdot   symbol space   dot  and letter space   3xdot  is also determined  by this entry     Parameters    lt Dot gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Dot Length  on page 68      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid FREQuency  lt Frequency gt   Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Parameters     Frequency   float    Range  0 1 to 20E3  Increment  0 01   RST  1020    Manual operation  See  Frequency  on page 68      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid LETTer   Letter     Sets the length of a letter space in seconds        Available only if     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  COMid  TSCHema is set to USER     Parameters     Letter  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Letter Space  on page 69    VOR Settings         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid PERiod   Period    Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Parameters     Period   float    Range  0 to 120  Increment  1   3   RST  9    Manual operation  See  Period  on page 68      SOURce lt hw gt 
66.  5                          155    5           lt      gt        115                                                          1                                              155    SOURce  hw   BB ILS MBEacon FREQuency MODE                    eese 155    5           lt      gt         1115                                                                                                                                155   50          lt      gt   88  5                                                                 4     0  2 6                              155                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid CODE   Code      Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport      Parameters    lt Code gt  string    Manual operation  See  Code  on page 61                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid DASH   Dash     Sets the length of a morse dash in seconds        Available only if     SOURce  hw     BB  ILS  MBEacon COMid  TSCHema is set to  USER     ILS Settings    Parameters    lt Dash gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid DEPTh   Depth   Sets the AM modulation depth of the of the COM ID signal     Parameters    lt Depth gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  5    Manual operation  See  Depth  on page 61      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid DOT   Dot      Sets the length of a morse dot in seconds  If the time s
67.  CH26Y   CH28X   CH28Y   CH30X   CH30Y    CH32X   CH32Y   CH34X   CH34Y   CH36X   CH36Y   CH38X    CH38Y   CH40X   CH40Y   CH42X   CH42Y   CH44X   CH44Y    CH46X   CH46Y   CH48X   CH48Y   CH50X   CH50Y   CH52X    CH52Y   CH54X   CH54Y   CH56X   CH56Y     RST  CH18X    Manual operation  See         Channel  on page 50      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  LLOBe  FREQuency    Frequency      Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the bottom viewed from  the air plane for the ILS GS modulation signal     Parameters     Frequency   float    Range  100 to 200  Increment  0 05   RST  150    Manual operation  See  Down Frequency  on page 51      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  MODE   Mode     Sets the operating mode for the ILS GS modulation signal     Parameters      Mode   NORM   ULOBe   LLOBe  NORM  ILS GS modulation is active   ULOBe    Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the upper lobe   90Hz  signal component of the ILS GS signal is active     LLOBe  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the lower lobe   150Hz  signal component of the ILS GS signal is active      RST  NORM    Manual operation  See  Mode  on page 50      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  PHASe   Phase      Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and lower antenna lobe of  the ILS GS signal  The zero crossing of the lower lobe  150  2  signal serves as a ref   erence  The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe   
68.  DELay                etn rrt nn renun 184    SOURce  hw   BB VOR TRIGger OBASeband lNHibit                          eese 184    SOURceshws BB VOR TRIGger              ecce rna nata ence epp        184   SOURcCeshw5EBB VOR TRIGgetr SLENgll       tcrra tp    at pi          185    SOURceshw   BB VOR TRIGger SOURCGS       iren                                         RE               185    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt    DELay                     essen 185    5  0           lt       gt                                          lt      gt                                    186      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR VAR DEPTh    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR VAR FREQuency             SOURce  hw   BB VOR  TRIGger    SEQuence           rette tn rnt engeren 186   lt                gt                                                      108                                                                                                                          FOR SER PEE DF MEE ELE 108   lt subsystem gt  SETTing DELete     subsystem SET Ting  LOAD        t erc ERE E EE EUER Cy HE eer        lt subsystem gt  SETTing STORe     subsystem    SETTing STORe  EAST    en n ert rr             109  ss  bsyst  m gt  STAT t                                          108    Index                           A  Add new VDB transmitter                                                   29  Airport ID     AID OTE WAS MIN CAUON                         37  Allocating the VDB to the time domain   PIM
69.  DIRac   ENPShape    EWPShape   LPASSEVM   RST  COSine   Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation    settings  on page 114    Manual operation  See  Filter  on page 43      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter APCO25  lt Apco25 gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter COSine  lt Cosine gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter COSine COFS  lt CoFs gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter GAUSs   Gauss      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter LPASs  lt LPass gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter LPASSEVM  lt LPassevm gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter PGAuss  lt PGauss gt     GBAS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter RCOSine  lt RCosine gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter SPHase  lt SPhase gt     Sets the corresponding filter parameter                                                        Filter Type Parameter Parameter            min max increment   default  APCO25 roll off factor  lt Apco25 gt  0 05 0 99 0 01 0 2               roll off factor  lt Cosine gt  0 05 1 00 0 01 0 35               cut off frequency shift  lt CoFs gt   1 1 0 01 0  GAUSs roll off factor   Gauss   0 15 2 5 0 01 0 3  LPASs cut off frequency  lt LPass gt  0 05 2 0 01 0 5  LPASSEVM cut off frequency  lt LPassEvm gt  0 05 2 0 01 0 5  PGAuss roll off factor  lt PGauss gt  0 15 2 5 0 01 0 3  RCOSine roll off factor  lt RCosine gt  0 05 1 00 0 01 0 35  SPHase BxT  lt SPhase gt
70.  EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger ARM EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  TRIGger ARM EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger ARM EXECute    Stops signal generation for trigger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed Retrigger       subsequent internal or external trigger event restart signal generation     Trigger Settings    Example  BB  VOR  TRIG SOUR INT  sets internal triggering   BB  VOR TRIG SEQ ARET  sets Armed_Retrigger mode  i e  every trigger event causes sig   nal generation to restart    BB  VOR  TRIG  EXEC   executes a trigger  signal generation is started    BB  VOR  TRIG  ARM  EXEC   signal generation is stopped    BB  VOR  TRIG  EXEC   executes a trigger  signal generation is started again                                                        Usage  Event    Manual operation  See  Arm  on page 27      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger EXECute    Executes a trigger  The internal trigger source must be selected using the command  BB xxx TRIG SOUR INT  where xxx stands for ILS  VOR or DME  and a trigger  mode other than AUTO must be selected using the command BB  xxx  TRIG  SEQ                 Usage  Event    Manual operation  See  Execute Trigger  on page 26      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut   Output      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut   Output      SOURce lt hw 
71.  FTP Longitude  Delta_FPAP Location Configuration    Delta FPAP Position Format  DeimaDegee     zl  Delta FPAP Latitude       0012650   Degree      Delta FPAP Longitude             0 027 897  Degree      Course Width at Threshold   Delta Length Offset   FAS Vertical Alert Limit   Approach Status   FAS Lateral Alert Limit   Approach Status       Differential GNSS    On       Remote command         SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig MT4State on          130       FAS Data Set  Enables you to configure the parameters of the Final Approach Segment  FAS  data  set     Provided are the parameters necessary to configure a single precision approach  The  FAS path is a line in space that defines the path an airplane follows on its final  approach  This line is defined by the Landing Threshold Point Fictitious Threshold  Point  LTP FTP   Flight Path Alignment Point  FPAP   Threshold Crossing Height   TCH   and the Glide Path Angle  GPA      The dialog displays also two graphs      Plan View  and a  Profile View   to visualize a  typical final approach path     Message Configuration Settings    Plan View         Earth s  surface    Profile View       WGS84 ellipsoid    Fig  4 1  Final Approach Segment  FAS  diagram  according to RTCA DO 246D    LTP FTP   Landing Threshold Point Fictitious Threshold Point  point at the center of the landing runway   defined by its WGS84 coordinates   GPIP   Glide Path Intercept Point  the point where the final approach path intercepts the 
72.  Frequency Channels  gt   Off     4  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration   The graph confirms the selected center frequency    5  Use the  Append  function to enable three VDBs  VDB 1 to VBD 3     6  Select  VDB 1  gt  Schedulling  gt  Config  and allocate VDB 1  VDB 2 and VDB 3 as  follwoing        Generating    GBAS Signal for Message Format Detection    BH GBAS  Scheduling 1  Frequency Number 0       Select  GBAS  gt  State  gt  On   Select  RF  gt  State  gt  On     The signal is generated at physical layer and the bursts carry arbitrary data            Prove that the VDB receiver detects the correct time slots  For example  the trans   mission of VDB 2 on frequency channel with 110 MHz carrier frequency and time  slots TS2  TS5 and TS7     9 4 Generating a GBAS Signal for Message Format Detec   tion    Message format detection tests verify wheteher the VDB receiver receives and deco   ded correctly parameters in the GBAS messages  The generated VDB signal in this  example contains real application data  Enabled are GBAS Message Type 2 and Mes   sage Type 1     To generate a GBAS signal for testing of correct message detection    1   2   3     Press PRESET to set the R amp S SMBV to a definite state    Select  Staus Bar  gt  Frequency   110 MHz    Select  Baseband  gt  Avionics  gt  GBAS  and select  Multiple Frequency Channels  gt   Off     Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration    The graph confirms the selected center frequency     Select  VDB 1  gt  Data  gt  Real 
73.  GI DIG eC 16                                    30  Altitude   Delta                 38                         if   REFERENCE location                           33  App  Data Length Dts eee cena 29  Append VDB transmitter                     29  Approach performance designator                                      37  Arm   Titlgger iiiter aee 27  49  64  72  86  Assigning a VDB to time slot   SENGS      30  Avionics standards   OVGIVIOW                       13                   R E 43  Baseband clipping    x  Baseband                         43  Bearing angle                               NENE                 67      Carrier frequency                            73   ILS Glide slope         50   IES Localize CEU 54   ILS              BEACONS                   iriiria aves 60          E 65  Carrier frequency mode   ILS Glide  Slope oret   ILS Localizer                     ILS Marker Beacons   VOR e EN  Channel mode   DME                                         72                     Ele   Mode    2                                                                               ts                            Multiplier   Source       VOR cc                                                                                                                                           there             58   I S  Marker Beaton Sisseneri               61              68             Letter Length   Marker Beacon modulation                                     62  69             Symbol Space 
74.  RUNCertainty  lt Runc gt     Set the refractivity uncertainty     Parameters    lt Runc gt  integer  Range  0 to 255   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Refractivity Uncertainty  on page 32      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig SHEight  lt SHeight gt        Sets the scale height     Parameters    lt SHeight gt  float    Range  0 to 25500  Increment  100    RST  0   Default unit  m    GBAS Settings    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format  detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Scale Height  on page 32                                                   SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig SVIGradient  lt Svig gt     Sets the Sigma_vert_iono_gradient     Parameters    lt Svig gt  float  Range  0 to 2 54999999356187e 05  Increment  0 1e 6   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Sigma vert iono gradient  on page 32      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig TDSState  lt Tdss gt     Enables the configuration of the Terminal Area Path  TAP  data set     Parameters    lt Tdss gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See  TAP Data Set  on page 39      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig TLAS  lt Tlas gt        Sets the value of the 
75.  Remote command    to enter the coordinates in Degree Minute Second format      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates  DMS  on page 121   to enter the coordinates in decimal degree format      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates   DECimal on page 121          Course Width at Threshold     FAS Data Set  Sets the lateral displacement from the path defined by the FAS at the LTP FTP at  which full scale course deviation indicator  CDI  deflection is attained     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig CWAThreshold on          121       Delta_Length Offset     FAS Data Set  Sets the parameter delta length  ALength  offset  that is the distance from the stop end  of the runway to the FPAP     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DLOFfset on page 124       FAS Vertical Alert Limit   Approach Status     FAS Data Set  Sets the value of the broadcast vertical alert limit     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  FVAA on page 125    FAS Lateral Alert Limit   Approach Status     FAS Data Set  Sets the value of the broadcast lateral alert limit     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt                      VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  FLAA on page 124       TAP Data Set  Enables you to configure the parameters of the Terminal Area Path  TAP  data set     Message Configuration Settings    A TAP defines the initial fix  IF   
76.  Use this to hide the detailed setting options display again     Code   Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport   If no coding is entered  the COM ID tone is sent  uncoded  key down      Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid CODE on page 145       Frequency  Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw            ILS LOCalizer COMid FREQuency on page 146    System Configuration Settings Localizer    Period  Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid PERiod on page 146       Depth  Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid DEPTh on page 145       Time Schema  Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     e  Standard   The set dot length determines the length of the dash  the symbol space and letter  space        User     You can set each length value seperately     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid TSCHema on page 147       Dot Length  Sets the length of a Morse dot in seconds     For  Time Schema  gt  Standard  this value determines also the length of the dash   3xDot length   symbol space    Dot length  and letter space  3xDot length      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  LOCalizer COMid DOT on          146       Symbol Space  Available only for  Time Schema  gt  User 
77.  VAR depth  and  COM ID  gt  Depth  must be  smaller than 100 96     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  VAR  DEPTh on page 160    Subcarrier Frequency  Sets the frequency of the FM carrier     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB VOR SUBCarrier  FREQuency  on page 160          Subcarrier Depth  Sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier     Note  The sum of  Subcarrier depth    VAR depth  and  COM ID  gt  Depth  must be  smaller than 100 96     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  SUBCarrier DEPTh on page 159             Position Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the different position settings  available for the VOR modulation     System Configuration Settings    0 00  deg 7       Bearing Angle  Sets the phase angle between the 30Hz VAR signal and the 30Hz reference signal   The orientation of the angle depends on the selected  Direction      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR          1        page 160       Direction   Sets the reference position of the phase information  The angle set under  Bearing  Angle  corresponds to the angle between the geographic north and the connection line  from beacon to airplane      From  Selection of the beacon as a reference position    To  Selection of the airplane position as a reference position     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  BANGle  DIRection      page 161       6 2 3            Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to 
78.  according  to     Delay   X Y mode delay   range distance   12 359 nm us   X mode delay   50 us  Y mode delay is 56 us   Changing one value automatically changes the other value     Parameters     Delay   float    Range  4E 6 to 5E 3  Increment  20   9   RST  50E 6    Manual operation  See  Reply Delay  on page 75      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPut TRIGger LEVel   Queries the measured trigger treshold     Return values      lt TriggerLevel gt  float  Range   200 to 200  Increment  0 01   RST  0   Usage  Query only    10 5 3    DME Settings            SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPut TRIGger SEARch     Determines the trigger level   50  voltage point of first pulse of the external DME  interrogation signal     This command determines the trigger point after connecting the R amp S NRP Z81 power  sensor to the external interrogation signal source  The search function has to be exe   cuted with each change of the level of the external DME signal     Return values      lt Search gt  0 1  OFF          RST  0  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Search Trigger Level  on page 75               SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME WIDTh   Width   Sets the pulse width  50  to 50  of peak voltage    Parameters    lt Width gt  float   Range  1E 6 to 100E 6   Increment  20E 9    RST  3 5E 6  Manual operation  See  Pulse Width  on page 76  DME Analysis Settings                  lt        gt                          15                                                        nnne 173            
79.  ceat rper rrr en rere e                        109    SOURceshw   BB GBAS SRINfoO           rnt    t er ni ete        116    SOURceshw  BB GBAS STA Te    nicotine irte             SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger ARM EXECute    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB GBAS  TRIG Ger EXECU    eis trente neenon ee oerte    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS TRIGger OBASeband DELay                       essen emen    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS TRIGger OBASeband INHibit                           esee    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed                  aiaa                 lt       gt              5                           lt      gt                                     lt       gt        6    5                           lt      gt                                2                190                 lt       gt        6    5                           lt      gt                                                 190    5           lt       gt              5                           lt      gt           2                       188                 lt       gt        6    5                         lt      gt                                  190                 lt       gt         6    5                              gt                       rennen 190    5           lt       gt        6    5                           lt      gt                                   189                 lt       gt          6    5                          lt      gt 
80.  clock    e  External   The external clock reference is fed in as the symbol clock or multiple thereof via the  CLOCK connector     The symbol rate must be correctly set to an accuracy of    2    see data sheet    The polarity of the clock input can be changed with the aid of  Global Trigger Clock  Settings     Remote command      SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   CLOCk  SOURce on          192     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  CLOCk  SOURce on page 192     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  CLOCk  SOURce on          192     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  CLOCk  SOURce on page 192                Clock Mode  Enters the type of externally supplied clock     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  CLOCk  MODE      page 191    SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  CLOCk  MODE on page 191    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  CLOCk  MODE on page 191    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   CLOCk MODE on page 191                   Clock Multiplier  Enters the multiplication factor for clock type  Multiple      Remote command          SOURce  hw     BB GBAS CLOCk MULTiplier      page 191    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  CLOCk MULTiplier on page 192    SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  CLOCk MULTiplier      page 192    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DHE  CLOCk MULTiplier      page 191                Measured External Clock  Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal     Remote command   CLOCk INPut FREQuency        Global Settings    8 5 Global Settings    The buttons in this section lead to dialogs for
81.  depth of modulation between the signal of the upper left lobe  90  Hz  and the lower right lobe  150 Hz   The maximum value equals the sum of the mod   ulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone The following is true     ILS GS GSL DDM DEPTh    AM 90Hz    AM 150Hz   100        A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB  and the value of the instrument current     Parameters      Depth   float  Range   0 8 to 0 8  Increment  1E 4   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Depth  on page 52      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  FREQuency  lt CarrierFreq gt        Sets the carrier frequency if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  GS  GSLope    FREQuency   MODE is set to USER        Parameters    lt CarrierFreq gt  float    Range  100E3 to 6E9  Increment  0 01   RST  334 7e6    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency  on page 50       SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  FREQuency MODE   Mode   Sets the carrier frequency mode for the ILS GS modulation signal     Parameters     Mode   USER   ICAO     RST  USER    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency Mode  on          49      SOURce  hw   BB ILS  GS GSLope  ICAO CHANnel   Channel      Selects the ICAO channel i e   the ILS GS transmitting frequency  The RF frequency is  set to the value selected here  The ICAO channel settings for ILS GS and ILS LOC are  coupled     ILS Settings    Parameters     lt Channel gt  CH18X   CH18Y   CH20X   CH20Y   CH22X   CH22Y       24      CH24Y   CH26X  
82.  general trigger  clock and mapping set   tings     Global Trigger Clock Settings   Calls the  Global Trigger Clock Input Settings  dialog    This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold  the input impe   dance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs    The parameters in this dialog affect all digital modulations and standards  and are  described in chapter  Global Trigger Clock Input Settings  in the Operating Manual     Generating GBAS Signals with Several Frequency Channels    9 How to Work with the GBAS Option    9 1    Testing GBAS receivers can be a challenging task  The main error sources that influ   ence the performance of a GBAS airborne device are typically caused by distortion on  the VHF link or mismatch in the application data  The former could be caused by inter   ference  multipath effects as well as ground and or surface reflections  The latter is  usually related to a bias in the differential corrections  message type 1 and 11  and or  mismatch between the TAP FAS data transmited on the link and the actually wanted  flight path by the air traffic control  ATC   message type 4      The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform some signal gen   eration tasks with the GBAS option and generate signals suitable for GBAS testing   The following sections focus on the R amp S SMBV configuration  Necessary configuration  in VDB receivers  devices under test  DUT  or other test equipment are beyond the  scope 
83.  gt     BB  DME   MODE is set to REPLy  indicates the mean pulse repeti   tion rate in squitter mode        Parameters      Rate   integer  Range  10 to 6000   RST  48    Manual operation  See  Pulse Repetition Rate  on page 74       SOURce  hw     BB DME RDIStance  lt RDistance gt     Sets the simulated distance between the interrogator and the transponder for reply  mode   BB DME MODE REPLy      The distance can be given in nautic miles  NM  or us with the command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME RDIStance  UNIT              If the unit is not provided next to the value  the value is considered to be in the current  unit  last unit set via GUI or the SCPI   The query always provide the value in the unit  set with    SOURce  hw     BB DME RDIStance  UNIT        The range distance and the external trigger delay are interdependent according to   range distance    trigger delay     X Y mode delay  12 359 us nm   X mode delay   50 us  Y mode delay is 56 us     Changing one value automatically changes the other value     DME Settings    Parameters     lt RDistance gt  float  Range   4 046  X    4 531      to 400  Increment  0 001   RST  0   Example  SOURce1 BB DME RDIS UNIT NM          sets the unit to NM   SOURce1 BB DME RDIS 1 5NM  sets the range distance to 1 5 NM   SOURCe1 BB DME  RDIS   Response 1 5   SOURCe1 BB DME RDIS 2005  sets the range distance to 20 us   SOURCe1 BB DME  RDIS   Response  1 618                                           Manual operation  See  Range Distance
84.  gt   BB VOR BANGle    SOURceshw5EBB VOR BANGIe DIReCtIOT                                                         161    SOURce lt hw gt   BB  VOR GLOCK MODE    pet                              191                lt       gt                                                                        192   SOURcCeshw5EBB VOR CEOCK SOURCGO        onerat ertt eed tp tee c      nece 192    SOURce  hw   BB VOR CLOCKk SYNChronization EXECute                    eese 192    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR CLOCk SYNChronization              enne 193    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid CODE    a    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB  VOR COMIG DAS Fh                                              SOURcesliwSEBBIVOR COMIGBEP Tli    cuc                                              ANNEE NENE ADEN NiE    SOURce lt hw  gt   BB  VOR  COMIG IDOT       dere tet        e te Rte         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid FREQuency        ESOURceshw gt   BBiVOR  COMIC             s oae ron inia inti ege neo ee                                          SOURceshws BB  VOR GOMId PER  IGGd        22                    i                             SOURC  shw EBB VOR COMIdISYMBOL      cm eoe docui                        Ee E         SOURce  shw   BB VOR COMid TSCHema                     eese                                            nennen nns    SOURceshw   BB VOR COMIG  5                                                                                                                                                    SOURce lt hw g
85.  gt  MCONfig  LOCation  COORdinates  DMS            SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LOCation COORdinates   ECimal on page 129       4 4 2 Message          4 Parameters    To access this settings     1     2  3  4   5  6    Select  GBAS  gt  Main dialog  gt  VDB Transmitters Configuration     Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration  gt  VDB   gt  Data  gt  Real GBAS Data   Select  Data Config  gt  Msg  Config     Select  Message Configuration  gt  Message Type 4  gt  On    Enable  FAS Data Set  gt  On    Enable  TAP Data Set  gt  On     The dialog comprises the parameters of message type 4  according to RTCA  DO 246D  Table 2 14    According to the RTCA DO 246D  the Message Type 4 contains one or more data  sets that contain approach data  associated vertical lateral alert limits  and or the  Terminal Area Path  TAP   With the settings provided in this dialog  you can config   ure the Final Approach Segment  FAS  data set  the TAP data set or both     Message Configuration Settings    Message Type 4  Enables you to configure the parameters of message type 4  according to RTCA  DO 246D  Table 2 18     GBAS    DB 1  Message Configuration    Profile View    Ellipsoid       Message Configuration Settings    Airport ID    Runway Number    Runway Letter    Approach Performance Designator  Route Indicator    Reference Path Data Selector    Reference Path ID  i 3A    LTP FTP Location Configuration    LTP FTP Position Format  DEG MIN SEC         LTP FTP Latitude  LTP
86.  hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON  ig GSADesignator on          126       Ground Station Continuity Integrity Designator  Selects the numerical designator that indicates the operational status of GBAS     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GCID on          125       Local Magnetic Variation   Sets the published local magnetic variation at the differential reference point  A positive  value represents an east variation  clockwise from true north     Remote command      SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  LMVariation on          128    Sigma vert iono gradient  Sets the parameter Overt iono                  that is the standard deviation of a normal distribu   tion associated with the residual ionospheric uncertainty due to spatial decorrelation     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON  ig SVIGradient on          134    Refractivity Index  Sets the estimated tropospheric refractivity index Ng at the reference point    Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  RFINdex on page 131    Scale Height  Sets the parameter scale height         used for scaling the tropospheric refractivity as a  function of differential altitude     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON  ig  SHEight on page 133    Refractivity Uncertainty  Sets the parameter oy  that is the standard deviation of a normal distribution associ   ated with the residual tropospheric uncert
87.  lt      gt       115 1                                                         2 2 12   111 1                          150    5           lt      gt         1151                                                                                                                           150  LSOURce lt hw gt  t                                    223                               151    5           lt      gt        1151                                   2      00000                                         151   85           lt      gt        5                                                                                                     151                             5                                        152               SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid CODE   Code     Sets the coding of the            signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport      Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  LOCalizer COMid TSCHema is set to  USER     Parameters    lt Code gt  string    Manual operation  See  Code  on page 58                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid DASH   Dash    Sets the length of a morse dash in seconds     Available only if     SOURce  hw     BB  ILS  LOCalizer COMid  TSCHema is set to  USER        Parameters    lt Dash gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Dash Length  on page 59                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid DEPTh 
88.  near the runway  They transmit a narrow beam width at  75 MHz carrier frequency in a vertical direction  Each of them has a different distinct  modulation code to allow the receiver to identify which one it is flying over  1MA193     Both visual  color of the marker beacon  and audio tone identification is supported for  determining which marker has been flown over  The audio visual pairing of marker  beacons is as follows    e Outer marker flashes BLUE in the cockpit at 400 Hz     relaxed    tone     e Middle marker flashes AMBER in the cockpit at 1300 Hz     hurried    tone        Inner marker flashes WHITE in the cockpit at 3000 Hz   urgent tone      VHF Omni Directional Radio Range  VOR     Very high frequency  VHF  omnidirectional radio range  VOR  is used for radio naviga   tion and helps aircrafts to determine their position and stay on course     A VOR system consists of a ground transmission station and a VOR receiver on the  board of the aircraft     The transmitter stations operate at VHF frequencies of 108 MHz to 118 MHz  with the  code identification  COM ID  transmitting on a modulation tone of 1 020 kHz  It emitts  two type of signals     Distance Measurement Equipment  DME        An omnidirectional reference signal  REF  that can consist of two parts       30 Hz frequency modulated  FM  sine wave on subcarrier 9 96 kHz from ampli   tude modulation  AM  carrier        1020 Hz AM modulated sine wave morse code       Adirectional positioning signal  variable  VA
89.  on how the parameter  Gated Power  Mode  influence the calculation     For step by step instruction  refer to chapter 9 2   Generating a GBAS Signal for  Receiver Sensitivity Tests   on page 98     Example  Calculating the power per time slot in  Gated Power Mode  gt  Off       Level     30 dBm       TS1  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS1  gt  Pow dB    0 dB       TS3  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS3  gt  Pow dB    0 dB   e  TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  State  gt  Off    TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  Pow dB     inf     Power                          24dBm        Level     30dBm OdB   OdB Se Se es Se vo lm ae               inf  inf    inf   inf    inf   inf                gt   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t time slots       The absolute power of both scheduled time slots is Prg                24 dBm            Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS     Example  Calculating the power per time slot in  Gated Power Mode  gt  On       Level    30 dBm        TS1  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS1  gt  Pow dB    0 dB        TS3  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS3  gt  Pow dB     3 dB     e  TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  State  gt  Off    TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  Pow dB                Power               Level      30dBM                  33dBm       1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t time slots           absolute power of the scheduled time slots is      Prs4    30 dBm                 33            Supported message types    The GBAS specification RTCA DO 246D defines the following man
90.  page 127   to enter the coordinates in decimal degree format      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates   DECimal on page 126       Delta FPAP Location Configuration     FAS Data Set  The Delta FPAD  AFPAD  represents the difference of latitude longitude of the runway  Flight Path Alignment Point  FPAP  from the LTP FTP     The Delta FPAD coordinates are defined in WGS84 coordinates  In this coordinate  System  a location is identified by three coordinates  the altitude  the latitude and the  longitude  The last two can be displayed in decimal or DMS format  Use the parameter   Position Format  to select the display format     Message Configuration Settings    Table 4 4  Delta_FPAP location configuration       Parameter Description        Position Format  Sets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed    e   DEG MIN SEC   The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction  i e   XX  XX XX XX  Direction  where direction can be North South and  East West    e  Decimal Degree   The display format is decimal degree                               where      indicates North and East and     indicates South and West         Latitude  Sets the difference of latitude of the FPAP in arc seconds   Positive values indicate the FPAP latitude north of LTP FTP latitude         Longitude  Sets the difference of longitude of the FPAP in arc seconds   Positive values indicate the FPAP longitude east of LTP FTP longitude             
91.  parameters     Filename   string    Only the file name is required    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format  detection  on page 111    Usage  Setting only  Manual operation  See  GBAS Differential File     on page 42      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG USER FILE   Filename    Loads the selected user defined file  extension                       Per default  the instrument stores user defined files in the  var user  directory  Use  the command MMEM  CDIRectory to change the default directory to the currently used  one        Setting parameters       Filename   string  For files stored in the default directory  only the file name is  required    Example  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB3 MCON  fig DG USER CATalog     Response gbas correction  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB3 MCONfig DG USER  FILE   gbas correction                 Usage  Setting only    GBAS Settings    Manual operation  See  GBAS Differential File          page 42                              SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG FILE   Queries the currently selected GBAS differential file     Return values    lt Filename gt  string    filename with file extension    rs_gbas     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format  detection  on page 111    Usage  Query only  Manual operation  See  GBAS Differential File          page 42         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DLOFfset  lt DelLenOff gt   Sets the Delta_Length offset              
92.  rate trigger         entere 74  Iseply delay             neret erts 79  Reply efficiency  analysis                                              79  State analysis            ie 77  DME               rit                                71  DME modulation  Dash length   ueste                82  Delay  extemal Wigger      eet 75  Dot l  ngtli      roter ete 81         Channel    on 73  ID frequency                    ttt mp eet 81  ID            coit rentre ere et ts 81  ID symbol space    ID CHIME SCHEMA           rer trae 81  INPUE SOUICE T                     74  Letter space                 92  Search trigger level      275  Squitter     73  DME reply  ID                      81  ID                                         80  Range distante             73           effiClelioy              74  DME reply mode  ID                                      ID dash length     ID dot length        ID frequency  rrr nrc rit repere   ID letter             orn rrt tamen   ID period              ID state                    ID symbol space         ID time schema                Documentation Overview             enne          7          Dot length  DME modulation            81  ILS Localizer fate  ILS Marker Beacons                       62  VOR                            68  Down frequency  IS Glide                                  51        Execute Trigger          DME 26  48  64  71  87   GBAS          26  48  64  71  87            26  48  64  71  87          26  48  64 71 87  Expected r
93.  the coordinates of the ground station reference location in decimal format     Parameters    lt Longitude gt  float  Range   180 to 180  Increment  1E 6   RST  0   lt Latitude gt  float  Range   90 to 90  Increment  1E 6   RST  0   lt Altitude gt  float  Range   83886 07 to 83886 07  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Reference Location Configuration  on page 33         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LOCation COORdinates DMS   lt LongitudeDeg gt    lt LongitudeMin gt    lt LongitudeSec gt     LongitudeDir     lt LatitudeDeg gt    lt LatitudeMin gt    lt LatitudeSec gt    lt LatitudeDir gt    lt Altitude gt     Defines the coordinates of the ground station reference location in degrees  minutes  and seconds     Parameters    lt LongitudeDeg gt  integer  Range  0 to 180   RST  0   lt LongitudeMin gt  integer  Defines the longitude minutes   Range  0 to 59   RST  0   lt LongitudeSec gt  float    Defines the longitude seconds     Range  0 to 59 999  Increment  0 001   RST  0    GBAS Settings     lt LongitudeDir gt  EAST   WEST  Defines the longitude direction    RST  EAST   lt LatitudeDeg gt  integer    Defines the latitude degrees    Range  0 to 90    RST  0   lt LatitudeMin gt  integer   Defines the latitude minutes    Range  0 to 59    RST  0   lt LatitudeSec gt  float   Defines the latitude seconds    Range  0 to 59 999   Increment  0 001    RST  0   
94.  to be adapted  to the glide slope value which is coupled to the localizer setting  see  chapter A 2 1   ILS Channel Frequencies   on page 195     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer                                              150      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope    FREQuency MODE on page 142                      Carrier Frequency  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  User Defined      Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope    FREQuency on          142          ICAO Channel  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  ICAO     Selects the ICAO channel and sets the corresponding transmitting frequency  The  ICAO channel settings for ILS GS and ILS LOC are coupled    Refer to chapter A 2   ICAO Channel Frequencies   on page 195 for an overview of  the standard defined ILS transmitting frequencies    Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt   BB     SOURce lt hw gt   BB     FH       5   LOCalizer ICAO CHANnel on          150  5   65   GSLope    ICAO  CHANnel on page 142             Al       DDM Polarity  Defines the polarity for DDM calculation  see  DDM Depth  on page 52      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   DDM  POLarity      page 141       Mode   Selects the operating mode for the ILS  ILS GS  modulation signal     Norm  ILS GS modulation is active     90 Hz  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the upper lobe signal    component  90Hz si
95.  to configure signal gen   eration with their corresponding remote control command for the specific standard       Remote Control Commands  Remote commands required to configure and perform signal generation in a  remote environment  sorted by tasks   Commands required to set up the instrument or to perform common tasks on the  instrument are provided in the main R amp S SMBV operating manual   Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually  be executed directly for test purposes       Annex  Reference material      List of remote commands  Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual       Index    1 2 Documentation Overview    The user documentation for the R amp S SMBV consists of the following parts         Online Help system      the instrument        Quick Start Guide  printed manual        Documentation CD ROM with       Online help system    chm  as a standalone help         Operating Manuals for base unit and options       Service Manual        Data sheet and specifications        Links to useful sites on the R amp S internet     Avionics Standards Preface              __   ______________________________________                          Online Help    The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware  It offers quick  context sen   sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming  The  online help contains help on operating the R amp S SMBV and all available options     Quick Start Gu
96. 084253119 1200  0 48782531447518 52 32057768227161 1100  0 49064540739393 52 32038679250167 1000  0 49541991083499 52 32019512664971 900  0 50027587576012 52 32000536916035  800  0 50535314978533 52 3200431506525  700  0 50926768002483 52 32002989881414  600  0 51213496693413 52 31984142364868  500  0 51596247360969 52 31963813345246  400             Supported File Formats    10 52023872584375 52 31964325051492  300  10 52435479286515 52 31930292486343  200  10 52746875803649 52 31913528562811 100      4 2 GBAS Differential File Format    The GBAS differential files are proprietary files with file extension   rs_gbas  The file  contains the required information for message type 1  as defined in the GBAS specifi   cation RTCA DO 246D     See example  Contents of the predefined GBAS differential file Correction1 rs_gbas   on page 204 for an example of the file format     Supported File Formats    Example  Contents of the predefined GBAS differential file Correction1 rs_gbas     lt referencel gt    lt general gt    lt property refcoord  11 5833 48 15 110   gt     lt  general gt     lt dgnssrecord gt    lt property modifiedzcount  215 1   gt    lt property measurementtype  0   gt    lt property ephemeriscrc  OxECF0       lt dgnssvector data  G1 4 311 49  1 20   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G3 16 81 6 3 41   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G4 110 65  1 1   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G10 21 6 31  0 51   gt    lt dgnssvector data  R6 61 5 85  0 41   gt    lt dgnssvector data  S125 126 212 
97. 1                           177    5           lt      gt                    1                                                1   12   414                                   177    5           lt      gt                                                                   0 0 0 0  0                        nne 177    SOURce  hw   BB DME ANALysis UAFactor                   esses nennen nennen 178    DME Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis EFFiciency     Queries the measured reply efficiency in percent  The measurement is the ratio of the  number of measured valid reply pulse pairs to transmitted pulse pairs in a measure   ment cycle     Return values    lt Efficiency gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  100    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Reply Efficiency  on page 74      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis EFFiciency OK     Queries if there are valid reply efficiency measurement values available in the set mea   surement window     Return values      lt Ok gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Reply Efficiency  on page 79      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis GATE COUNt   Count      Sets the number of pulse pairs which are sent from the R amp S SMBV    interrogator  to  the ground station in one measurement cycle  Only reply pulses for which the 50   voltage point of the rising edge of the first pulse is within the measurement window are  used to evaluate the delay time and reply efficiency     Parameters    l
98. 113 30 1104 1167    122   117 50 1146 1209  38Y 110 15 1062 1125    80Y 113 35 1104 1041    122Y 117 55 1146 1083  39X 110 20 1063 1000    81X 113 40 1105 1168    123   117 60 1147 1210  39Y 110 25 1063 1126    81Y 113 45 1105 1042    123Y 117 65 1147 1084  40X 110 30 1064 1001    82X 113 50 1106 1169    124X 117 70 1148 1211  40Y 110 35 1064 1127    82Y 113 55 1106 1043    124Y 117 75 1148 1085  41X 110 40 1065 1002    83X 113 60 1107 1170    125X 117 80 1149 1212  41Y 110 45 1065 1128    83Y 113 65 1107 1044    125Y 117 85 1149 1086  42X 110 50 1066 1003    84X 113 70 1108 1171    126X 117 90 1150 1213  42Y 110 55 1066 1129    84Y 113 75 1108 1045    126Y 117 95 1150 1087                      A 3 Default Settings    A 3 1    A 3 2    In the following chapter the standard default settings for the Avionic standards are lis   ted  The preset value of each parameter is specified also in the description of the cor   responding remote command     GBAS    The default settings for the GBAS standard are        Parameter    Value                               State Not affected by  Set to Default   Filter  Clipping Cosine  Clipping Off   Trigger Internal  Auto   Clock Internal   Multiple Frequency Channels Off   Sample Rate 10 5 KHz  ILS    The default settings for the ILS standard are     Table 1 5  Glide slope default settings    Default Settings                                  Parameter Value   State Not affected by Set to default  Sum of Depth 80 Percent   Fly Up   DDM 0   Mode 
99. 134       TAP Lateral Alert Limit   Status     TAP Data Set  Sets the value of the broadcast lateral alert limit     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig TLAS on page 134    443 Differential GNSS Parameters    Differential GNSS is an approach that uses known GNSS reference locations to deter   mine channel correction parameters  The retrieved information is transmitted to other  GNSS receivers to increase the accuracy of their position information     To access this settings    1  Select  GBAS  gt  Main dialog  gt  VDB Transmitters Configuration       2  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration  gt  VDB   gt  Data  gt  Real GBAS Data   3  Select  Data Config  gt  Msg  Config     4  Select  Message Configuration  gt  Differential GNSS  gt  On      Filter Clipping Settings    Differential GNSS    On    Differential GNSS parameters    GBAS Differential File    Correction1        The dialog enables you to load a file with GBAS differential data  Per default  the  Correctionl rs_gbas file is used     5  Select  GBAS Differential File  and load your user defined file   Refer to chapter A 4 2   GBAS Differential File Format   on page 203 for descrip   tion of the required file format     Differential GNSS  Enables the use of differential GNSS data     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG STATe on page 122       GBAS Differential File      Accesses the  Select Proprietary File  dialog to select a file containing dif
100. 142        Parameters     lt Logarithmic gt  float  Range   999 9 to 999 9  Increment  1E 4   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Logarithmic  on page 53      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM PCT   Pct      Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the upper lobe  90 Hz   and the lower lobe  150 Hz   The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation  depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone        See also    SOURce lt hw gt            ILS  GS   GSLope            DEPTh on page 142     Parameters      Pct   float  Range   80 0 to 80 0  Increment  0 01   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Percent  on page 53      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM POLarity  lt Polarity gt     Sets the polarity for DDM calculation  see     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  GS GSLope    DDM  DEPTh            The DDM depth calculation depends on the selected polarity     e Polarity 90 Hz   150 Hz  default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz    AM  150 Hz      100        Polarity 150 Hz   90 Hz   DDM     AM 150 Hz    AM  90 Hz      100     Parameters    lt Polarity gt  P90 150 P150 90     RST  P90 150  Manual operation  See  DDM Polarity  on page 50      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM STEP  lt DdmStep gt     Sets the variation of the difference in depth of modulation via the rotary knob     ILS Settings    Parameters    lt DdmStep gt  DECimal   PREDefined     RST  DECimal      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM DEPTh  lt Depth gt     Sets the difference in
101. 15 9 41   gt     lt  dgnssrecord gt     lt dgnssrecord gt    lt property modifiedzcount  225 1   gt    lt property measurementtype  0   gt    lt property ephemeriscrc  0xEFF0   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G1 4 311 49  1 20   gt     dgnssvector data  G3 16 81 6 3 41   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G4 110 65  1 1   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G10 21 6 31  0 51   gt    lt dgnssvector data  R6 61 5 85  0 41   gt    lt dgnssvector data  S125 126 212 15 9 41   gt     lt  dgnssrecord gt     lt dgnssrecord gt    lt property modifiedzcount  235 1   gt    lt property measurementtype  0   gt    lt property ephemeriscrc  OxBCF0       lt dgnssvector data  G1 4 311 49  1 20   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G3 16 81 6 3 41   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G4 110 65  1 1   gt    lt dgnssvector data  G10 21 6 31  0 51   gt    lt dgnssvector data  R6 61 5 85  0 41   gt     dgnssvector data  S125 126 212 15 9 41   gt     lt  dgnssrecord gt      lt  referencel gt     The table 1 10 describes the used tags and parameters     Table 1 10  Format of   rs_gbas file                             lt dgnssrecord gt     Container Tag name Parameter Description   lt reference1 gt    lt general gt    lt property gt   lt refcoord gt  longitude  latitude and altitude of the reference point       one  lt dgnssrecord gt  per measurements       Supported File Formats       Container       Tag name    Parameter    Description                    lt property gt   lt modifiedzcount gt  modified z count for the record  s    lt mea
102. 2  for the ILS LOC signal contents  The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal  depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones     Parameters    lt Sdm gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  40    Manual operation  See  Sum of Depth  on page 56    ILS Marker Beacon Settings                   lt      gt       115                                                    1   1      040006                          152   9             lt      gt          5                                                                 152   85           lt      gt        5                                                                                     153                lt      gt        5                                                                             153    5           lt      gt        115                                                                2 4144                              153   SOURce  hw   EBB IES MBEacon COMIG LET Ter    aiio eicere atio tane zr cna so        153    5           lt      gt       115                                                          1 1 1 1   77 144414444040006                              154    5           lt      gt         1115                                                           2      1 404414 11400                               154    5           lt      gt        115                                                   2   0 999                   154    5           lt      gt         115                             
103. 2 359 nm us  where  X mode delay   50 us  Y mode delay   56 us  Changing one value automatically changes the other value     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DHE  PINPut  DELay on page 171       Search Trigger Level     Pulse Input  Available only for  Trigger Mode    Ext Power Sensor      Determines the trigger level   5096 voltage point of first pulse of the external DME  interrogation signal     After connecting the R amp S NRP Z81 sensor to the external interrogation signal source    Search Trigger Level  determines the trigger point  The search function has to be exe   cuted with each change of the level of the external DME signal     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME  PINPut  TRIGger  SEARch  on          172                Pulse Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the pulse settings available  for DME interrogation        Pulse Settings    Pulse Shape           x   Pulse Rise     20   Pulse Width     357   Pulse Fall     207   Pulse Spacing   120        On            Single Pulse       Pulse Shape   Selects the pulse shape     Cos 2  The falling and the rising edge of the pulse are cos 2 shaped     Cos Cos 2  The rising edge is cos shaped and the falling edge is cos 2 shaped    Linear  The falling and the rising edge of the pulse are linear shaped    Gauss  The pulse has a gaussian form     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  SHAPe on page 169    7 2 3    System Configuration Settings    Pulse Rise  Sets the ri
104. 30X 109 30 1054 991    72X 112 50 1096 1159    114   116 70 1138 1201  30  109 35 1054 1117    727 112 55 1096 1033    1147 116 75 1138 1075  31X 109 40 1055 992    73X 112 60 1097 1160    115   116 80 1139 1202  SAY 109 45 1055 1118    737 112 65 1097 1034    1157 116 85 1139 1076  32X 109 50 1056 993    74   112 70 1098 1161    116   116 90 1140 1203  327 109 55 1056 1119    74   112 75 1098 1035    116   116 95 1140 1077  33X 109 60 1057 994    75   112 80 1099 1162    117X 117 00 1141 1204  33Y 109 65 1057 1120    75Y 112 85 1099 1036    117Y 117 05 1141 1078  34X 109 70 1058 995    76X 112 90 1100 1163    118X 117 10 1142 1205  34Y 109 75 1058 1121    76Y 112 95 1100 1037    118Y 117 15 1142 1079  35X 109 80 1059 996    77X 113 00 1101 1164    119X 117 20 1143 1206  35Y 109 85 1059 1122    77Y 113 05 1101 1038    119Y 117 25 1143 1080  36X 109 90 1060 997    78X 113 10 1102 1165    120X 117 30 1144 1207  36Y 109 95 1060 1123    78Y 113 15 1102 1039    120  117 35 1144 1081                                                 Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 198                                                    Default Settings   Ch  VOR DME DME    Ch  VOR DME DME Ch  VOR DME DME  No  Freq    Interrog  Reply    No  Freq    Interrog   Reply No  Freq    Interrog  Reply  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq    37X 110 00 1061 998    79X 113 20 1103 1166    121   117 40 1145 1208  37Y 110 05 1061 1124    79Y 113 25 1103 1040    121Y 117 45 1145 1082  38X 110 10 1062 999    80X 
105. 32    Reference Path ID     FAS Data Set  Sets the reference path identifier as three or four alphanumeric characters used to des   ignate the reference path     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt                      VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPIF on page 132       LTP FTP Location Configuration     FAS Data Set   The coordinates of the LTP FTP are defined in WGS84 coordinates  In this coordinate  system  a location is identified by three coordinates  the altitude  the latitude and the  longitude  The last two can be displayed in decimal or DMS format  Use the parameter   Position Format  to select the display format     Message Configuration Settings    Use the parameter LTP FTP Height to define the altitude   Table 4 3  LTP FTP location configuration       Parameter Description        Position Format  Sets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed    e   DEG MIN SEC   The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction  i e   XX  XX XX XX  Direction  where direction can be North South and  East West         Decimal Degree   The display format is decimal degree  i e                        where      indicates North and East and     indicates South and West         Latitude  Sets the latitude of the LTP FTP in arc seconds         Longitude  Sets the longitude of the LTP FTP in arc seconds              Remote command    to enter the coordinates in Degree Minute Second format      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates DMS  on
106. 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Course Width at Threshold  on page 39      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates   DECimal  lt Longitude gt    lt Latitude gt     Defines the coordinates of the Delta FPAD location in decimal format     Parameters    lt Longitude gt  float  Range   1 0 to 1 0  Increment  1E 6   RST  0   lt Latitude gt  float  Range   1 0 to 1 0  Increment  1E 6   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Delta FPAP Location Configuration  on page 38      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates DMS   lt LongitudeDeg gt    lt LongitudeMin gt    lt LongitudeSec gt    lt LongitudeDir gt     lt LatitudeDeg gt    lt LatitudeMin gt    lt LatitudeSec gt    lt LatitudeDir gt     Defines the coordinates of the Delta FPAD location in degrees  minutes and seconds     Parameters     lt LongitudeDeg gt  integer  Range  0 to 1 0   RST  0    GBAS Settings     lt LongitudeMin gt  integer  Defines the longitude minutes   Range  0 to 59   RST  0   lt LongitudeSec gt  float  Defines the longitude seconds     Range  0 to 59 999  Increment  0 001     RST  0   lt LongitudeDir gt  EAST   WEST  Defines the longitude direction    RST  EAST   lt LatitudeDeg gt  integer    Defines the latitude degrees    Range  0 to 1 0    RST  0   lt LatitudeMin gt  integer   Defines the latitude minutes    Range  0 to 59    RST  0   lt LatitudeSec gt  
107. 5  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Example  BB  VOR  TRIG SOUR EXT    selects an external trigger   BB  VOR  TRIG  EXT DEL 50  sets a delay of 50 symbols for the trigger                    Manual operation  See  Trigger Delay  on page 89      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit  lt Inhibit gt      SOURce  hw   BB ILS TRIGger   EXTernal  ch   INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following an exter   nal trigger event     Parameters     lt Inhibit gt  integer  Range  0 to 67108863   RST  0   Example  BB  VOR  TRIG SOUR EXT    selects an external trigger   BB  VOR  TRIG  EXT  INH 200    sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event           Manual operation  See  Trigger Inhibit  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME   TRIGger  SEQuence  lt TriggerMode gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS  TRIGger  SEQuence   Sequence      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  TRIGger  SEQuence  lt TriggerMode gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR  TRIGger  SEQuence  lt TriggerMode gt     Selects the trigger mode     Marker Settings DME    Parameters     lt TriggerMode gt  AUTO   RETRigger   AAUTo   ARETrigger   SINGle  AUTO  The modulation signal is generated continuously   RETRigger    The modulation signal is generated continuously  A trigger event   in
108. 5 2 2 Amplitude Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the ILS GS amplitude     80 0    v                  0 0000   0 000 0  dB 7   0 00          Fixed        ii       System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope    Sum of Depth  SDM    Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the upper lobe  90  2  and lower  lobe  150Hz  ILS GS signal contents  The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal  depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   SDM on          144       Fly  Selects the simulation mode for the ILS GS modulation signal  A change of the setting  automatically changes the sign of the DDM value     This setting simulates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course      Up  The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is neg   ative  the airplane is too low  it must climb      Down  The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is posi   tive  the airplane is too high  it must descend      Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   DDM  DIRection on page 140       DDM Step   Selects the variation of the DDM values     Decimal  Decimal variation according to the current cursor position     Predifined  Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized DDM val   ues     Remote command             DDM Current  Sets the current of the ILS indicating the instrument corresponding to the DDM value   The i
109. 52  VOR Stein e                         156  VOR General                                                nennen 156  VOR System Configuration                                  157  VOR COM ID Settings                 ee ae tae 161  DME Setting K 164  DME General                                                                     164  DME System Configuration                                                     165  DME Analysis          5                                         ener nnne 172  DME COM ID Settings uc ore tereti sr tek etre Ea ee RE          178  Trigger Settings                eren                                                                        181  Marker Settings DME                   nre reiten                                                    187  Marker Settings GBAS                 nien ttim                                            188  Clock Setting                                            sees 191  P lp                                                          194  Morse Code Settings             ie nie te Ri ie                   IN Ria Ge deux 194  ICAO Channel                                                     40      195       2 1     2 2     2 3             3 1     3 2  A 3 3  A 3 4      4     4 1     4 2    ILS Channel                                             195  VOR Channel Frequencies     1                      nennen nnn senes 195  DME Channel Frequenties                    eere eia eaa da d d e 196  BEND fce                        
110. 79  Reply efficiency   DME                 rosea ebat          pue es ae        79                                         idet    cx xe he Sexe       74  Reply efficiency  analysis                                 nere rete      79       Right frequency  ILS Localizer           RPDS   yc eR 37         S once tenet iere tonus ders               40                                      204  R  tiway letter              37  RUNWAY                             37  5                                   26  45  Save Recall                 25  48  63  70            m 25  48  63  70     cc 25  48  63  70       25  48  63  70   Scalehelglib  s                 on ier         32  SCMEQUIING eer 29  Search trigger level   PME modulation  cort nott ene tin eben 15  Set synchronbzaltlOn                                    95          default    arre cniin 24  47  63  70  Show Hide details   DME               MO   ILS Localizer   ILS Marker BEACONS           ci rac                61   VOR                                    67  Sigma     Sigma vertical ionospheric gradient                                    32  Signal duration Unit                           86  Signal generation status       t ner d 86  Single pulse   p m                             SIS accuracy  minimum  Speed vs  interference suppression                                    15  Squitter   DME IDferrogatlOrt               ree ets            enter      73  SSID                                28  Standard deviation of a normal distr
111. 8 93Y 114 65 1117 1054  10X 1034 971    52X 111 50 1076 1013 94X 114 70 1118 1181  10Y 1034 1097    52Y 111 55 1076 1139 94Y 114 75 1118 1055  11X 1035 972    53X 111 60 1077 1014 95X 114 80 1119 1182  11Y 1035 1098    53Y 111 65 1077 1140 95Y 114 85 1119 1056  12X 1036 973    54   111 70 1078 1015 96X 114 90 1120 1183  12Y 1036 1099    54   111 75 1078 1141 967 114 95 1120 1057  13   1037 974    55   111 80 1079 1016 97   115 00 1121 1184  13   1037 1100    55Y 111 85 1079 1142 97   115 05 1121 1058  14X 1038 975    56   111 90 1080 1017 98X 115 10 1122 1185  14Y 1038 1101    56Y 111 95 1080 1143 98Y 115 15 1122 1059  15   1039 976    57   112 00 1081 1018 99X 115 20 1123 1186  15Y 1039 1102    57Y 112 05 1081 1144 99   115 25 1123 1060  16   1040 977    58   112 10 1082 1019    100   115 30 1124 1187  16   1040 1103    58   112 15 1082 1145    100  115 35 1124 1061  17   108 00 1041 978    59   112 20 1083 1020    101   115 40 1125 1188  17   108 05 1041 1104    597 112 25 1083 1146    1017 115 45 1125 1062  18   108 10 1042 979    60X 1084 1021    102   115 50 1126 1189  18   108 15 1042 1105    60   1084 1147    1027 115 55 1126 1063                                                 Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 197    Avionics Standards Annex       H a u IMMI ee ee eee                                                          Ch  VOR DME DME    Ch  VOR DME DME Ch  VOR DME DME  No  Freq    Interrog  Reply    No  Freq    Interrog   Reply No  Freq    Interrog  Reply   F
112. 93X   CH93Y   CH94X   CH94Y   CH95X   CH95Y   CH96X    CH96Y   CH97X   CH97Y   CH98X   CH98Y   CH99X   CH99Y    CH100X   CH100Y   CH101X   CH101Y   CH102X   CH102Y    CH103X   CH103Y   CH104X   CH104Y   CH105X   CH105Y    CH106X   CH106Y   CH107X   CH107Y   CH108X   CH108Y    CH109X   CH109Y   CH110X   CH110Y   CH111X   CH111Y    CH112X   CH112Y   CH113X   CH113Y   CH114X   CH114Y    CH115X   CH115Y   CH116X   CH116Y   CH117X   CH117Y    CH118X   CH118Y   CH119X   CH119Y   CH120X   CH120Y    CH121X   CH121Y   CH122X   CH122Y   CH123X   CH123Y    CH124X   CH124Y   CH125X   CH125Y   CH126X   CH126Y     RST  CH1X    Manual operation  See         Channel  on          73      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PPS  lt     5 gt     Sets the spacing between the first and second pulse of a pulse pair  time between half   voltage points on the leading edge of each pulse      Available only for     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  SING1eOFF       Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 167    DME Settings    Parameters    lt Pps gt  float    Range  1E 6 to 200E 6  Increment  20E 9   RST  12E 6    Manual operation  See  Pulse Spacing  on page 76      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PPST  lt SpacTolerance gt   Sets the pulse pair spacing tolerance     Parameters     lt SpacTolerance gt  float  Range  0 to  200E 6  2  Increment  20E 9   RST  5E 6      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME RATE  lt Rate gt     If    SOURce lt hw gt           DME  MODE is set to  NTerrogation  sets the pulse repetition  rate     If    SOURce lt hw
113. AD on page 109  SETTing DELete on page 108            subsystem       ILS Component  Selects the ILS component      Glide slope  Enables the glide slope    Localizer  Enables the localizer      Marker Beacons   Enables the marker beacons     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  TYPE on page 139    System Configuration  Accesses the  System Configuration  dialog  see       chapter 5 2   System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope   on page 49 for the  glide slope settings     chapter 5 3   System Configuration Settings Localizer   on page 53 for the local   izer settings      chapter 5 4   System Configuration Settings Marker Beacons   on page 60 for the  marker beacons settings    Trigger Marker      Accesses the dialog for selecting the trigger source  for configuring the marker signals  and for setting the time delay of an external trigger signal  see chapter 8 1   Trigger  Settings   on page 85     The currently selected trigger source is displayed to the right of the button     Execute Trigger  Executes trigger manually     You can execute the trigger manually only if you select an internal trigger source and a  trigger mode other than  Auto     Remote command      SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  TRIGger EXECute on page 183     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger EXECute on page 183    SOURce  hw    BB VOR  TRIGger EXECute on page 183    SOURce  hw    BB DME  TRIGger EXECute on page 183                            System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope    Arm  For trig
114. Avionics Standards  Digital Standards for R amp S9SMBV  Operating Manual          1176 8600 02     05          5                 gt   o     a       2               35 o               This document describes the avionics software options   Described are the following software options        R amp S  SMBV K111  1419 2396 xx       R amp S  SMBV K151  1419 2621 xx       R amp S  SMBV K152  1419 2664 xx       R amp S  SMBV K153  1419 2667 xx    This manual describes firmware version FW 3 20 281 xx and later of the R amp S  SMBV100A        2015 Rohde  amp  Schwarz GmbH  amp  Co  KG   M  hldorfstr  15  81671 M  nchen  Germany   Phone   49 89 41 29   0   Fax   49 89 41 29 12 164   Email  info rohde schwarz com   Internet  www rohde schwarz com   Subject to change     Data without tolerance limits is not binding    R amp S   is a registered trademark of Rohde  amp  Schwarz GmbH 4       KG   Trade names are trademarks of the owners     The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual  R amp S  SMBV100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMBV  R amp S  WinIQSIM2    is  abbreviated as R amp S WinIQSIM2    1 1  1 2  1 3  1 4    21  2 2    3 1  3 2  3 3  3 4    4 1  4 2  4 3  4 4  4 4 1  4 4 2  4 4 3  4 5  4 5 1  4 5 2  4 5 3  4 6    5 1  5 2  5 2 1    Contents                                      7                                                                                   7  Documentation                                             5                                               
115. BV without a measurement cylcle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband  signal in order to set the correct RF level  If the standard is switched ON for the first  time  or after every subsequent ON OFF sequence  the measurement cycle will take  place to determine the correct RF level  Every subsequent parameter change in the  DME standard will be performed without another measurement cycle in order to pro   vide a continous signal output     State  Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modu   lation modes in the same path     Remote command    lt subsystem gt  STATe on page 108    Set To Default  Calls the default settings  The values of the main parameters are listed in chapter A 3    Default Settings   on page 199     Remote command     subsystem    PRESet on page 108    Save Recall   Accesses the  Save Recall  dialog  i e  the standard instrument function for storing and  recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file  The provided navigation possibil   ities in the dialog are self explanatory     General Settings    The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable  the file extension is  however predefined    Remote command     lt subsystem gt  SETTing CATalog on page 108    subsystem   SETTing STORe on          109    lt subsystem gt  SETTing  STORe  FAST on page 109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing  LOAD on page 109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing  DELete on page 108       DME Mode   Selects the DME modul
116. CONfig DFLocation COORdinates  DMS       Response  0 0 45 54 WEST 0 1 40 429 NORT  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig CWAThreshold 105  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig DLOFfset 0  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig FVAA 0  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig FLAA 40                                      SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig TDSState ON  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig RPDT 21  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig RPIT  GTN   SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig WAYPoint  PREDefined CATalog       Response  Braunschweig  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig WAYPoint PREDefined  FILE  Braunschweig   SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig WAYPoint  FILE       Response   Braunschweig txt   SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig NOPPoint                          Response  11      to query user waypoint files in the default directory     SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig WAYPoint USER CATalog      Response  gbas waypoint  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig FRCLink 3  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig TVAS 50  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig TLAS 2       SOURCe1 BB GBAS STATe ON  OUTput1 STATe ON    Example  Adjusting clock  marker and trigger settings  The following example lists the provided commands          KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK       Clock settings                                                                                                                                               SOURCe1 BB GBAS CLOCk SOURce INTernal                                                                                           
117. DB Transmitter     Receiver   GBAS Ground Station    Fig  3 1  GBAS components and signals  simplified representation     1   GNSS reference receiver   2   GBAS ground station   3   VHF data broadcast  VDB  transmitter  a   GNSS navigation message   b   Pseudorange   c   GBAS Correction message   d   VDB signal    The GBAS GNSS reference receivers receive the GNSS navigation message  perform  pseudorange measurements and transmits this information to the GBAS ground sta   tion  The GBAS ground station determines errors in the calculated positions  adds  additional parameters and approach path information  produces a GBAS correction  message and sends it the VDB transmitter  The VDB transmitter modulates and enco   des this message and broadcasts it to the                GBAS equipment  for example a  GBAS receiver in the airplane  The GBAS equipment in the airplane is a high precision  multimode receiver that evaluates the message and applies corrections parameters to  improve the navigation algorithms from GPS     This list outlines the three signals transmitted between the components and are refer   red as GBAS Signal in Space       GNSS satellite to GBAS ground subsystem navigation signal      GNSS satellite to GBAS airbone subsystem navigation signal      GBAS ground subsystem to GBAS airbone subsystem VHF data broadcast           Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS     This firmware option enables you to generate the VHF data broadcast    Carrier frequencies and frequ
118. ESet    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS PRESet    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR PRESet    Sets all parameters to their default values   RST values specified for the commands       lt subsystem gt  SETTing CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing CATalog    Queries the files with the standard settings in the default directory  Listed are files with  the file extension     dme     gbas   ils   vor     Refer to section  MMEM Subsystem  in the R amp S SMBV manual for general information  on file handling in the default and a specific directories     Return values     Catalog    lt filename1 gt   lt filename2 gt          Returns a string of file names separated by commas     Usage  Query only     lt subsystem gt  SETTing DELete    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing DELete   Filename      Avionics Standards Remote Control Commands  E      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing DELete   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing DELete   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing DELete   Filename      Deletes the selected file from the default or specified directory  Deleted are files with  the file extension     dme    gbas   ils   vor     Refer to section  MMEM Subsystem  in the R amp S SMBV manual for general information  on file handling in the default and a specific directories     Setting parameters     Filename   string    Usage  Setting only     l
119. ET SRATe   Queries the used sample rate     Return values    lt SRate gt  float    Range  10 49E3 to 10 51E3  Increment  1E 3   RST  10 5E3    Example  see example  Quering the default filter  clipping and modulation  settings  on page 114    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Sample Rate Variation Sample Rate Info  on page 26    10 3    10 3 1    10 3 2    ILS Settings    ILS Settings          The BB  ILS subsystem contains all commands for configuring a ILS signal        See also chapter 10 6   Trigger Settings    on page 181 and chapter 10 9   Clock Set   tings   on page 191 for a description of the trigger and clock settings     General Settings    ESOURceshw gt                                                       139  PSOURCeshw gt   BB     STATO                              139  espe Biz Teal ed                   EE 139      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS PRESet  Sets the ILS default settings       SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS STATe   State   Activates deactivates the ILS modulation     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON     RST  0      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  TYPE  lt          gt   Selects the ILS modulation type     Parameters    lt Type gt  GS   LOCalize   GSLope   MBEacon     RST  GS    Manual operation  See  ILS Component  on page 48    ILS Glide Slope Settings     500       lt      gt   88 1 51 65  65                                                                                140   50            lt      gt   88 1 51  65  65                                 
120. ETTing EORAD                        ce paar ke             109    SOURCe  hw  BBHIES SETTIngEORBD       cione tetro late                    109   SOURceshw  pEBBE NVOR SET Ting LOAD  uiii Loris eto cn E eu      Deci      109  SSUDSYSIENIAISET Ting S TOR    eate en terae sie        eter he eque  109    Primary Settings    ESOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTING                e tete ere Pene 109   SOURce lt hw  gt   BB GBAS   SET Ting S TOR    cane entere        109   SOURceshw   EBBHUES SET Ting S TOR            nuez iuum tete tarte            109  ESOURce lt hw   BB VOR SET Ming     TOR    i ern Ll      ei aie cn dnce        109    subsystem  SETTihg STOReJ AST                               109               lt       gt                                                                     1                  109                lt      gt                   5                                                                                  109   SOURce  lt hw gt   BBiLS SETTing S TORE  FAS I                     110  ESOURce  hw  E BB VOR SETTiRng S TOReIFAST             iicet titre Rede              110     lt subsystem gt  STATe    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME STATe   State     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS STATe   State     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS STATe   State     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR STATe   State      Activates deactivates the VOR modulation    Parameters     lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  0     lt subsystem gt  PRESet    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PRESet    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS PR
121. GBAS Data  and select  Data Config  gt  Message  Config      Enable  Message Type 2    On     Configre the settings as required  For this example  enable a reference location  with coorrdinates  Altitude   110m    Latitude   48 150 deg  and  Longitude    11 5833 deg     Enable  Differantial GNSS    On  ans select  GBAS Differential File    Predefined  Files    Correction1     9 5    Generating a GPS        a GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests    BE GBAS  VDB 1  Message Configuration    Message Type 2  Message Type 2 parameters  Ground Station Reference Receivers 3 ref  receivers    Ground Station Accuracy Designator       Ground Station Continuity Integrity Designator             Local Magnetic Variation    5         99     Sigma_vert_iono_gradient    00000000      2     Refractivity Index 379    Scale Height   100            Refractivity Uncertainty   20    Reference Location Configuration    Position Format  DecimalDegree      Altitude                 Latitude   8 160 000  dea      Longitude    11 583 300 9  9  gt      Message          4          Differential GNSS            Differential GNSS parameters    8  Select  GBAS  gt  State  gt  On        9  Select  RF  gt  State  gt  On     10  At the VDB receiver  verify that   e the received values of each parameter are within the allowed value range  e the received parameters are decoded correctly  e the VDB messages are discarded if they do not comply to the standards     Generating a GPS and a GBAS Signal for Multi Mod
122. ILS GS transmitting frequencies  see chapter A 2 1   ILS Channel  Frequencies   on page 195   The start value can be selected in the  field  CAO Channel   below   The selection is effective on both ILS modulations  A change to mod   ulation ILS GS automatically causes the RF frequency to be adapted  to the glide slope value which is coupled to the localizer setting  see  chapter A 2 1   ILS Channel Frequencies   on page 195      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer  FREQuency MODE               150      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   FREQuency  MODE      page 142                      Carrier Frequency  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  User Defined      Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer FREQuency      page 150       ICAO Channel  Available only for  Carrier Frequency Mode  gt  ICAO      Selects the ICAO channel and sets the corresponding transmitting frequency  The  ICAO channel settings for ILS GS and ILS LOC are coupled     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS LOCalizer ICAO CHANnel on          150       DDM polarity  Defines the polarity for DDM calculation  see  DDM Depth  on page 57      Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS LOCalizer DDM POLarity on page 149    5 3 2    System Configuration Settings Localizer    Mode   Selects the operating mode for the ILS LOC modulation signal     Norm  ILS LOC modulation is active     90 Hz  Amplitude modulation of the outpu
123. ME ANALysis TIME OK  on          177                      Reply Efficiency   Indicates the measured reply efficiency in percent  The measurement is the ratio of the  number of measured valid reply pulse pairs to transmitted pulse pairs in a measure   ment cycle If there are no valid measurements available in the set measurement win   dow  invalid  is indicated    Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis EFFiciency       page 173    SOURce  hw    BB DME ANALysis EFFiciency OK       page 173                Pulse Repetition Rate   Indicates the measured mean pulse repetition rate of the DME ground station    If there are no valid measurements available      the set measurement window  invalid  is  indicated    Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis  PRRate  on page 175    SOURce  hw    BB DME ANALysis PRRate OK       page 176                   7 2 5            Settings    To access this dialog   1  Select  DME  gt  DME Mode  gt  Reply    2  Select  DME  gt  System Configuration      The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the COM ID settings availa   ble for the DME reply modulation     System Configuration Settings    100 0            300 0       v   100 0              300 0        7        COMIID State  Enables disables an additional communication identification  COM ID  signal     The ID signal consists of a regular group of pulses that generates Morse code dots and  dashes     The transmission of the ground signal is interru
124. Norm   Up Frequency 90 Hz   Down Frequency 150 Hz   Up Down Phase 0 deg                         COMIID State Off   COWM ID Frequency 1020 kHz   COWM ID Depth 10 percent   Table 1 6  Localizer default settings   Parameter Value   State Not affected by Set to default       Sum of Depth       40 Percent                                                                Fly Up   DDM 0   Mode Norm   Left frequency 90 Hz  Right Frequency 150 Hz  Left Right Phase 0 deg  COMIID State Off  COWM ID Frequency 1020 kHz             Period 9s  COWM ID Depth 10 percent  Table 1 7  Marker Beacon default settings   Parameter Value  State Not affected by Set to default  Marker frequency 400 Hz  Marker Depth 95 96  COMIID State Off               Frequency 1020 kHz       Default Settings                         Parameter Value   COMIID Period 9s   COM ID Depth 10 percent   Rf frequency 75 MHz     3 3 DME    The default settings for the DME standard are   Table 1 8  Default settings for the DME standard       Parameter Value       General Parameters       State Not affected by Set to default       DME Mode Interrogation       Signal Settings                Channel Mode X Channel   Carrier Frequency 1 025 000 000 000 GHz  Pulse Squitter Off   Pulse Repetition Rate 48 Hz       Pulse Settings                      Pulse Shape Cos 2  Pulse Rise 2 00 us  Pulse Width 3 50 us  Pulse Fall 2 00 us  Pulse Spacing 12 00 us  Single Pulse Off       Receive Settings          Pulse Pair Spacing Tolerance 1 00 us    
125. Path to be followed  TAP and FAS        the second R amp S SMBV simulates a real time errors in the actual path followed by  the airplane when compared to the TAP path the Air Traffic Controller  ATC  is ask   ing for     Generating a GPS and    GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests    Consider a hadrware in the loop  HIL  setup with the second R amp S SMBV     10 Remote Control Commands    The following commands are required to perform signal generation with the Avionics  option in a remote environment  We assume that the R amp S SMBV has already been set  up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S SMBV documentation  A  knowledge about the remote control operation and the SCPI command syntax are  assumed        For a description of the conventions used in the remote command descriptions  see  section  Remote Control Commands  in the R amp S SMBV operating manual     o Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions    Placeholder  lt Subsystem gt     To simplify the description of the remote control commands  the placeholder    Subsystem   is introduced  Depending on the avionic standard used as an entry  standard  replace this placeholder  lt Subsystem gt  with for example SOURce   BB  GBAS  for GBAS                 commands containing this placeholder are not recognized and accepted by the instru   ment     o The replacement of the place holder  lt Subsystem gt  is mandatory  i e  remote control  Example   SCPI command   subsystem                  
126. R   30 Hz AM modulated sine waves  with variable phase shift    The position of the aircraft is determined by measuring azimuth as the difference in  phase of those two signals  The magnetic north is defined as the reference point  for  which both signals are exactly in phase     3 4 Distance Measurement Equipment  DME     DME is a radar system used to determine the slant distance of an aircraft    DME inter   rogator  to a ground station    DME transponder   For this purpose  shaped RF double  pulses are transmitted by the aircraft to the ground station and  after a defined delay     reply delay   the ground station sends the pulses back again  The receiver in the air   craft uses the round trip time of the double pulses to determine the distance to the  ground station        E  Ground    Fig  3 6  DME principle    Most DME ground stations are combined with a VOR system in order to allow an air   craft to determine its precise position relative to this station  The DME channels are  paired with the VOR channels and range from 1025 MHz to 1150 MHz for the aircraft  transmitter and 962 MHz to 1213 MHz for the ground stations  The frequency delta  between received and transmitted signal is always 63 MHz  The channel spacing  between the various DME channels is always 1 MHz     Each channel has two different codings  X and Y  that differ with regard to their pulse  spacing  The assignment of a channel and coding to a ground station always remains  the same during operation and i
127. SMBV for the slave  instruments        Sync  Output to External Trigger    OFF        Corresponds to the default state of this parameter   The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger  event but because of the instrument   s processing time the first sam   ples are cut off and no signal is output  After elapsing of the internal  processing time  the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event       Ext                                Calculated  signal          Signal at  the output        Processing time          Trigger Settings     Off  The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and  starts with sample O  i e  the complete signal is output   This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences  with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the  instrument       Ext     Trigger Event    Calculated  signal          Signal at  the output    Remote command      SOURce  hw    BB GBAS  TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut  on page 183    SOURce  hw    BB ILS TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut  on page 183    SOURce  hw    BB VOR  TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut  on page 183     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut  on page 183                      Trigger Delay  Delays the trigger event of the signal from      the external trigger source    Use this setting to      synchronize the instrument with the device under test  DUT  or other external devi   ces    Remote command  
128. ST  4  Example  BB  xxx CLOCk SOURce EXTernal    selects the external clock source    BB  xxx CLOCk MODE MSAMple   selects clock type  Multiplied   i e  the supplied clock has a rate  which is a multiple of the sample rate   BB xxx CLOCk MULTiplier 12   the multiplier for the external clock rate is 12              Manual operation  See  Clock Multiplier  on page 95      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CLOCk SOURce   Source      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCk SOURce   Source      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS CLOCk SOURce   Source      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR CLOCk SOURCce   Source      Parameters     lt Source gt  INTernal   EXTernal  INTernal  The internal clock reference is used   EXTernal    The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connec   tor      RST  INTernal    Manual operation  See  Clock Source  on page 95      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute    Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument s settings required for the syn   chronization mode  set with the command BB  xxx             SYNC             where xxx  stands for 11 5  VOR or DME           Clock Settings       Example  BB xxx CLOC SYNC MODE MAST  the instrument is configured to work as a master one   BB  xxx CLOC  SYNC  EXEC  all synchronization s settings are adjusted accordingly                        
129. TYPe      Response   D8PSK   SOURCe1 BB GBAS MSET SRATe      Response  10500             SOURCe1 BB GBAS MFCHannels ON  SOURce1 BB GBAS MSET  SRATe      Response  525000  SOURCe1 BB GBAS  SRINfo       Response   525 kHz        SOURCe1 BB GBAS CLIPping STATe      Response  0  SOURCe1 BB GBAS CLIPping LEVel      Response  100  SOURce1 BB GBAS CLIPping MODE                 Response  VECTor    GBAS Settings    10 2 2 General Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VERSion   Queries the specification according to that the settings are implement     Return values    lt Version gt  string    Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS VERSion   Response   RTCA DO 246D           Usage  Query only      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS WAVeform CREate   Filename      With enabled signal generation  triggers the instrument to store the current settings as  an ARB signal in a waveform file  Waveform files can be further processed by the ARB  and or as a multi carrier or a multi segment signal     The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable  the predefined file  extension for waveform files is     wv     Setting parameters      lt Filename gt  string   Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111   Usage  Setting only    Manual operation  See  Generate Waveform File  on page 25      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SCATIi  lt 5       gt   Enables using of SCAT I header information instead of the default LAAS  GBAS              header   Parameters    lt SCAT gt
130. VOR  TRIGger  EXECute on page 183      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  TRIGger  EXECute on page 183                                            Transmitters Configuration Settings    Arm   For trigger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed Retrigger   stops the signal generation  until subsequent trigger event occurs    Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger ARM EXECute               182    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger ARM EXECute      page 182       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 182    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  TRIGger ARM EXECute      page 182                         Clock  Accesses the dialog for selecting the clock source  see  Clock  on page 27     4 2 VDB Transmitters Configuration Settings    To access this dialog     1  Select  GBAS  gt  Main dialog  gt  VDB Transmitters Configuration      EH GBAS  VDB Transmitters Configuration    Center frequency MHz   999 875 999 900 999 925 999 950 999 975 1000 000 1000 025 1000 050 1000 075 1000 100 1000 125              dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the VHF Data Broadcast   VDB  signals    The graph visualizes 11 adjacent frequency channels  symmetrically located  around the current central frequency  To define the central frequency  set the  parameter  Status Bar  gt  Frequency   In the graph  the central frequency is referred  as frequency number 0    The frequency channel of the selected VDB is highlighted     2  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration  gt  Appe
131. age 79      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis TRIGger SEARch     Determines the trigger level   50  voltage point of first pulse of the external DME  interrogation signal     This command determines the trigger point after connecting the R amp S NRP Z81 power  sensor to the external interrogation signal source  The search function has to be exe   cuted with each change of the level of the external DME signal     Return values      lt Search gt  0 1                 RST  0  Usage  Query only      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis lAFactor     Queries the internal adjustment factor  the mathematically calculated value of the time   when the pulse reaches its 50  level     Return values    lt InternalAdjFact gt  float    Range  0 to 200  Increment  10E 9   RST  0                Query only    Manual operation  See  Internal Adjustment Factor  on page 84      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis PSAFactor     Queries the power sensor adjustment factor determined during a normalization of the  setup  You can normalize the setup with     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DHE  ANALysis   NORMalize         Return values     PowSensAdjFact   float    Range  0 to 200  Increment  10E 9   RST  0    10 5 4    DME Settings    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Power Sensor Adjustment Factor  on page 83      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis UAFactor  lt UsedFactor gt   Sets which internal adjustment factor should be used     Parameters     lt UsedFactor gt  INTernal   PSENsor  INTernal  The math
132. ainty     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RUNCertainty on          133    Message Configuration Settings    Reference Location Configuration   The coordinates of the ground station reference point are defined    WGS84 coordi   nates  In this coordinate system  a location is identified by three coordinates  the alti   tude  the latitude and the longitude  The last two can be displayed in decimal or DMS  format  Use the parameter  Position Format  to select the display format     Table 4 2  Reference location configuration       Parameter Description        Position Format  Sets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed     e   DEG MIN SEC   The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction  i e   XX  XX XX XX  Direction  where direction can be North South and  East West    e  Decimal Degree   The display format is decimal degree                               where      indicates North and East and     indicates South and West         Altitude  Sets the altitude of the ground station reference point  that is the height above    the ellipsoid  HAE  altitude        Latitude  Sets the latitude of the ground station reference point           Longitude  Sets the longitude of the ground station reference point           Remote command   to enter the coordinates in Degree Minute Second format         on page 129  to enter the coordinates in decimal degree format         DI         SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch
133. and letter  space    e  User     You can set each length value seperately     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid  TSCHema on page 163    Dot Length  Sets the length of a Morse dot in seconds     For  Time Schema    Standard  this value determines also the length of the dash   3xDot length   symbol space    Dot length  and letter space  3xDot length      Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  COMid DOT      page 162    Dash Length  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a Morse dash in milliseconds     System Configuration Settings    Symbol Space  Available only for  Time Schema  gt  User      Sets the length of a symbol space in milliseconds     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid  SYMBo1 on          163    Letter Space  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a letter space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  COMid  LETTer      page 162    General Settings    7 DME Configuration and Settings     gt       access this dialog select  Baseband Block  gt  DME      7 1 General Settings    This dialog provides access to the general settings of the DME standard  like enabling  the standard and selecting the DME mode     Set To Default   Save Recall                         Interrogation m    System Configuration       Trigger Marker      Auto    Clock      Internal    Changing a parameter in the DME standard will cause an instant signal change in the  R amp S SM
134. and the associated ICAO                            channels  Ch  No  LOC   GS Freq  Ch  LOC   GS Freq  Ch  LOC   GS Freq   Freq  No  Freq  No  Freq    18X 108 10 334 70 32X 109 50 332 60 46X 110 90 330 80  18Y 108 15 334 55 32Y 109 55 332 45 46Y 110 95 330 65  20X 108 30 334 10 34   109 70 333 20 48   111 10 331 70  20   108 35 333 95 34Y 109 75 333 05 48   111 15 331 55  22   108 50 329 90 36X 109 90 333 80 50X 111 30 332 30  22X 108 55 329 75 36Y 109 95 333 65 50Y 111 35 332 15  24X 108 70 330 50 38X 110 10 334 40 52X 111 50 332 90  24Y 108 75 330 35 38Y 110 15 334 25 52Y 111 55 332 75  26X 108 90 329 30 40X 110 30 335 00 54X 111 70 333 50  26Y 108 95 329 15 40Y 110 35 334 85 54Y 111 75 333 35  28X 109 10 331 40 42X 110 50 329 60 56X 111 90 331 10  28Y 109 15 331 25 42Y 110 55 329 45 56Y 111 95 330 95  30X 109 30 332 00 44X 110 70 330 20  30Y 109 35 331 85 44   110 75 330 05                                           2 2        Channel Frequencies    The individual values      the table cells are      Ch  No    ICAO channel number     VOR Freq    VOR Interrogation frequency  MHz     Avionics Standards Annex                 I IMIM MMM     Table 1 3  Standardized VOR transmitting frequencies  MHz  and the associated ICAO channels                                                          Ch  VOR Ch  VOR Ch  VOR Ch  VOR Ch  VOR Ch  VOR  No  Freq  No  Freq  No  Freq  No  Freq  No  Freq  No  Freq   17X   108 00 45     110 80 75X 112 80 89X   17Y   108 05 45Y   110 85 757 112 85 89 
135. anual operation  See  Airport ID  on page 37            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig APDesignator  lt ApPerDes gt     Sets the approach performance designator     Parameters    lt ApPerDes gt  GAB   GC   GCD   RST  GAB  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Approach Performance Designator  on          37         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig ATCHeight  lt Tch gt   Sets the approach threshold crossing height     Parameters    lt Tch gt  float  Range  0 to 1638 35  Increment  0 05   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Plan View Profile View Parameters  on page 36      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig ATUSelector  lt TchUnit gt        Sets the units the approach TCH is experssed in  see     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig ATCHeight     Parameters    lt TchUnit gt  FEET   MET     RST  FEET    GBAS Settings    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message  type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Plan View Profile View Parameters  on page 36         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig CWAThreshold  lt CrWdAtTh gt     Sets the course width at threshold     Parameters    lt CrWdAtTh gt  float  Range  80 to 143 75  Increment  0 01   RST  80  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 
136. ariable but is automatically set and calculated     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     DLENgth on page 118       No  of Frames  Displays the automatically calculated number of frames of the selected VDB     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   NOFRames   on page 119       Scheduling  Accesses the dialog for configuring the scheduling in the time domain  see chapter 4 3    Scheduling Settings   on page 30     Append  Insert  Delete  You can configure up to 8 VDB transmitters  Use the appropriate general functions      Append  Adds a new row in the table of VDB transmitters     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB  APPend on page 116        Insert  Adds a new row above the currently selected one     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     INSert on page 116        Delete  Deletes the selected row     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     DELete on page 117       Scheduling Settings  4 3 Scheduling Settings    To access this dialog   1  Select  GBAS  gt  Main dialog  gt  VDB Transmitters Configuration    2  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration  gt  VDB   gt  Scheduling  gt  Config          GBAS  Scheduling 1  Frequency Number 0         xl                              em  0  3 00                        ort                       ort   nr         nr           nF      5                               0 00                ort           The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure th
137. arrier phase shifts     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   MSET  MTYPe  on page 138    Sample Rate Variation Sample Rate Info   Sets displays the used sample rate variation  You can set the sample rate value in the   Filter Clipping Settings  dialog    This setting can be used for testing the symbol rate tolerance     The RTCA DO 246D specification defines a symbol rate of the GBAS data broadcast  as 10500 symbols sec  Because of the used modulation  see Modulation Type   each  symbol defines one of eight states  This results in a nominal bit rate of 31500 bits s     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  MSET   SRATe  on page 138    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  SRIN  o                116       4 5 3 Clipping Settings  Provided are the following settings     Clipping State  Switches baseband clipping on and off     Global Settings    Baseband clipping is a very simple and effective way of reducing the crest factor of the  signal  Since clipping is done prior to filtering  the procedure does not influence the  spectrum  The EVM however increases     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS CLIPping  STATe on          137       Clipping Level  Sets the limit for clipping     This value indicates at what point the signal is clipped  It is specified as a percentage   relative to the highest level  100  indicates that clipping does not take place     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS CLIPping  LEVel on          137          Clipping Mode  Selec
138. ation mode  The mode determines the signal type that is simu   lated  The exact timing of the signal for each mode is determined by the selected X or  Y channel     The timing and shape of the pulses can be freely selected  By default these values are  set according to the standard      Interrogation  The interrogation signal of the airborne transmitter is simulated      Reply  The reply signal of the ground based transponder is simulated   The trigger is automatically set to external and the default trigger  delay either to 50 us  channel X  or 56 us  channel Y  depending on  the selected channel   The interval between the pulse pairs can be set to a fixed value  rep   etition rate  or to random generation  pulse squitter     Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  MODE on page 164    System Configuration  Accesses the  System Configuration  dialog for configuration of the interrogation or  reply modulation  see chapter 7 2   System Configuration Settings   on page 72     Trigger Marker      Accesses the dialog for selecting the trigger source  for configuring the marker signals  and for setting the time delay of an external trigger signal  see chapter 8 1   Trigger  Settings   on page 85     The currently selected trigger source is displayed to the right of the button     Execute Trigger  Executes trigger manually     You can execute the trigger manually only if you select an internal trigger source and a  trigger mode other than  Auto     Remote command     SOUR
139. broadcast lateral alert limit     Parameters    lt Tlas gt  float  Range  0 to 2 54  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See         Lateral Alert Limit   Status  on page 41            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig TVAS  lt Tvas gt     Sets the value of the broadcast vertical alert limit     GBAS Settings    Parameters    lt Tvas gt  float  Range  0 to 127  Increment  0 5   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See         Vertical Alert Limit   Status  on page 41      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint PREDefined CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint  USER CATalog     Queries the names of the existing user defined predefined waypoint files   Per default  the instrument stores user defined files in the  var user  directory  Use    the command MMEM  CDIRectory to change the default directory to the currently used  one        Only files with extension     t xt are listed     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message  type 4  on page 112    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Waypoint File  on page 40      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint PREDefined FILE   lt WpFile gt     Loads the selected predeifned file  extension     txt      Setting parameters    lt WpFile gt  string    Only 
140. ce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       B GBAS TRIGger EXECute on page 183  B ILS TRIGger EXECute on page 183  B VOR TRIGger EXECute on page 183  B  DME  TRIGger EXECute on page 183                   tU UU UU       System Configuration Settings    Arm  For trigger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed Retrigger   stops the signal generation  until subsequent trigger event occurs     Remote command                              SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger ARM EXECute               182    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger ARM EXECute      page 182       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger ARM  EXECute               182    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 182   Clock      Accesses the dialog for selecting the clock source  see chapter 8 4   Clock Settings    on page 94     7 2 System Configuration Settings    To access this dialog   1  Select  DME  gt  DME Mode  gt  Interrogation      2  Select  System Configuration      7 2 4 Signal Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the DME modulation signal        ignal Settings              Mode X Channel E    1 025 000 000 o0  GHz                         1 025 000 000 00 GHz         0 00  NM         2 700   2                                              2700              100    7     Signal settings for  DME Mode  gt  Interrogation  Ext Triggered  50 00 ps             Signal settings for  DME Mode  gt  Reply        Channel Mode  Selects 
141. ch spectrum mask requirements     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS FILTer  PARameter  LPASs on page 136    SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS FILTer  PARameter  LPASSEVM               136             Cut Off Frequency Shift   available for filter parameter Cosine only      The cut off frequency is a filter characteristic that defines the frequency at the 3 dB   down point  The  Cut Off Frequency Shift  affects this frequency in the way that the fil    ter flanks are  moved  and the transition band increases by  Cut Off Frequency   Shift   Sample Rate     e A Cut Off Frequency Shift     1 results in a very narrow band filter     Increasing the value up to 1 makes the filter more broad band   e By  Cut Off Frequency Shift    0  the  3 dB point is at the frequency determined by  the half of the selected  Sample Rate      Tip  Use this parameter to adjust the cut off frequency and reach spectrum mask  requirements        Filter Clipping Settings    m         Cut Off Frequency Shift    1  5 Cut Off Frequency Shift   0        Cut Off Frequency Shift   1        2 3 f  H  Cut Off Frequency         Fig  4 3  Example of the frequency response of a filter with different Cut Off Frequency Shift    Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS FILTer  PARameter COSine COFS      page 136       4 5 2 Modulation Settings  Provided are the following settings     Modulation Type  According to the GBAS standard  symbols are converted to differentially encoded 8  phase shift keyed  D8PSK  c
142. chema is set to STD the length  of the dash  3xdot   symbol space   dot  and letter space   3xdot  is also determined  by this entry     Parameters    lt Dot gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Dot Length  on page 62      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid FREQuency   Frequency   Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Parameters    lt Frequency gt  float    Range  0 1 to 20E3  Increment  0 01   RST  1020    Manual operation  See  Frequency  on page 61      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid LETTer   Letter     Sets the length of a letter space in seconds              Available only if     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  MBEacon COMid  TSCHema is set to  USER     ILS Settings    Parameters    lt Letter gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Letter Space  on page 62      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid PERiod   Period   Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Parameters     Period   float    Range  0 to 120  Increment  1E 3   RST  9    Manual operation  See  Period       page 61         SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid SYMBol   Symbol    Sets the length of the symbol space in seconds     Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  MBEacon  COMid  TSCHema is set to  USER     Parameters     Symbol   float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Symbol Space  on          62         SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COM
143. configure the COM ID settings availa   ble for the VOR modulation         10 0     3    Y             State  Enables disables an additional communication identification  COM ID  signal     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid  STATe                163       Show Hide Details  Reveals the detailed setting options for the COM ID signal     Once the details are revealed  the labeling on the button changes to  Hide Details      Use this to hide the detailed setting options display again     System Configuration Settings    Code   Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport   If no coding is entered  the COM ID tone is sent  uncoded  key down      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid  CODE on page 161       Frequency  Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid  FREQuency               162          Period  Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  COMid  PERiod on page 163       Depth  Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal     Note  The sum of  Subcarrier depth    VAR depth  and  COM ID  gt  Depth  must be  smaller than 100 96     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  COMid             on page 162       Time Schema  Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     e  Standard   The set dot length determines the length of the dash  the symbol space 
144. d as follows   e  DDM Polarity  gt  90 Hz   150 Hz   default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz    AM  150 Hz    e  DDM Polarity  gt  150 Hz   90 Hz    DDM     AM 150 Hz          90 Hz    A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the value of the  instrument current and the DDM value in dB     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  GS GSLope    DDM  PCT on page 141    DDM   SDM Coupling  Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation  depths  SDM  see below     Fixed DDM  The absolute DDM values stays constant when the SDM is changed    Coupled to SDM   The absolute DDM values changes when the SDM is changed  The  DDM value expressed in dB stays constant     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   DDM  COUPling on page 140       System Configuration Settings Localizer    To access this dialog   1  Select  ILS  gt  ILS Component  gt  Localizer      2  Select  ILS  gt  System Configuration     System Configuration Settings Localizer    5 3 1 Signal Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the ILS localizer  ILS LOC   modulation signal     User Defined       108 100 000 000  MHz    90 Hz   150 Hz hd    0 00  deg                                                      Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal      User Defined  Activates user defined variation of the carrier frequency      ICAO  Activates variation in predefined steps according to the standardized  
145. dards Trigger Marker Clock Settings  pes poc                       ee ee    8 3     Fix marker delay to current range   Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed on page 190       Marker Settings DME    The marker settings are available only for options R amp S SMBV K111   K153  DME      This dialog provides access to the settings necessary to select and configure the  marker output signal  like the marker mode or marker delay settings     Marker Mode    Marker 1  First Pulse  50  Level      Marker Width   10  chips  0 05 ps      Marker Delay   0  chips  0 05 ps      Marker 2  Received Pulse Marker Width   10  chips  0 05 us  7         Marker Delay   0  chips  0 05 ps      Processing Delay   0 00  us 5                        Selects a marker signal for the associated marker channel  The settings        used to  select the marker mode defining the shape and periodicity of the markers  The con   tents of the dialog change with the selected marker mode      First Pulse  Start    Pulse Start   Sets the marker at the begining of the pulse           Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 92    Avionics Standards Trigger Marker Clock Settings     First Pulse  50  Level    Pulse  50  Level    Sets the markers to the point  where the level of the pulse has  reached 50          Received Pulse   Sets  Marker 2  on the received pulse        Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME MARK
146. datory message  types  This implementation supports all required message types  Refer totable 3 1 for  information on where to find the related settings     Table 3 1  Overview of the required message types                Message Type Description Related settings  1 Differential Corrections chapter 4 4 3   Differential GNSS Parame   100 sec smoothed pseudor  ters   on page 41  anges  2 GBAS Related Data chapter 4 4 1   Message Type 2 Parame   ters   on page 31  4 Final Approach Segment  FAS Data Set  on page 35     FAS  Construction Data       Terminal Area Path  TAP   TAP Data Set  on page 39  Construction Data       11 Differential Corrections chapter 4 4 3   Differential GNSS Parame     30 sec smoothed pseudor  ters   on page 41    anges                For step by step instruction  refer to chapter 9 4   Generating a GBAS Signal for Mes   sage Format Detection   on page 100     The Instrument Landing System  ILS        If your task requires verifications and measurements of GBAS installations on the  ground and in the air  consider to use the R amp S  EVS300 ILS VOR analyzer     This instrument is a portable level and modulation analyzer  If equipped with the  required options  it is capable to performe VHF data link measurements on GBAS as  well as measurements on conventional ILS ground systems and VOR systems        Rohde amp Schwarz solution for radio analysis       3 2 The Instrument Landing System  ILS     The instrument landing system is used during the landing appr
147. dre ae ttn Lippe rry ue          191  ESOURCe lt hw gt  BBILS CLOCK MODE       prit torpe nee                 thu x ruit    191     SOUBceshw  rBEVORIDEOCKMODE         boni eue           191   SOURce  hw    BB DME CLOCK MUL                                                  nennt nennen          191    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS CLOCK MULTiplier                   ecciesie 191    SOURGe  hwerFBBIES CLOGCIEMULTIplIer                 rotate           192  ESOURce  shiw   FBB VOR GEOGEKMULTplier                                                    192    SOURGeshw  rBB IDME CEOCKSQOUEGO       1                          192   SOURGe  hw  EBBIGBAS OLOCKSODR GA    2 2                   192   SOURceshw  EBBHAES CLOGIKSOUR CGe  cct                          192  ESOURce  hw  EBB IVOR OEOGCIKSO  UNRG                                192                lt      gt                                                                                                                     192   5           lt      gt                                                                                                                    192                lt      gt          9                                                                                                        192                lt      gt                          8                                                                                      192                lt      gt                                                                         
148. e  GBAS Differential File   message type 1   containing ephemeris  as well as ionospheric corrections     Select  GBAS  gt  State  gt  On   Select  RF  gt  State  gt  On     In the instrument 1  trigger the signal generation                    At the multi mode receiver  measure the resulting bias   Is the augmentation improved     The multi mode receiver should calculate the plane position with ideally less error  than in the case of a standalone GPS    The differential GPS correction parameters transmited by the VHF link  message  types 1 and 11  enhance the navigation algorithm and should lead to a better posi   tion fix     Possible extensions  With this test setup you can simulated different conditions and perform a number of  measurement  like     e Use the AWGN generator of the R amp S SMBV and superimpose noise on the gener   ated GBAS signal    e Simulate the GNSS signal in multipath environment    e Use the ephemeris parameters in the navigation message to simulate satellite fail   ure    e Simulate the effects caused by obscuration and multipath on the GNSS signal  like  reflections and absorption from different surfaces        Use the clock correction parameters to simulate satellite clock errors      Change the ionospheric parameters      the atmospheric message   The full range of GBAS test include flight testing  Consider a test setup with two  R amp S SMBVs  where        the first R amp S SMBV simulates    GBAS signal with message type 4 corresponding  to the 
149. e  Receiver Tests    GBAS airborne receivers are based on the multi mode receiver  MMR  technology  A  multi mode receiver consists of a GPS antenna  a VHF antenna and processing equip   ment and supports simultaneous signal reception of different landing and precision  navigation systems  like GPS  GBAS and ILS     In this example  we use two R amp S SMBV to generate a GPS signal and a GBAS signal  for MMR testing  The aim of this GBAS test is to measure the resulting  improved  aug   mentation     Generating a GPS           GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests    Overview of required relevant options    Instrument 1     option GPS  R amp S SMBV K44      GNSS global option R amp S SMBV K91  Extension to 12 Satellites       generation of more than 12 satellites requires additionally GNSS global option  R amp S SMBV K96  Extension to 24 Satellites        GNSS Extension for Obscuration Simulation and Automatic Multipath  R amp S SMBV   K101    Instrument 2       option GBAS  R amp S SMBV K111     Connecting and configuring the two R amp S SMBV instruments for synchronous  signal generation    In this following  only the related settings are discussed  For detailed information on  cabling and required configuration  refer to        R amp S SMBV Operating Manual  section  Synchronous Signal Generation     e Application Note 1GP84  Time Synchronous Signals with Multiple R amp S SMBV100A  Vector Signal Generators         Connect the instruments to work in master slave mode  se
150. e carrier frequency if    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  LOCalizer FREQuency   MODE is set to USER     Parameters     CarrierFreq   float    Range  100     to 6E9  Increment  0 01   RST  108 1e6    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency  on page 54       SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  FREQuency MODE   Mode    Sets the carrier frequency mode for the ILS LOC modulation signal   Parameters     Mode  USER   ICAO    RST  USER    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency Mode  on page 49       SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer ICAO CHANnel   Channel      Selects the ICAO channel i e   the ILS LOC transmitting frequency  The RF frequency  is set to the value selected here  The ICAO channel settings for ILS GS and ILS LOC  are coupled     Parameters      Channel   CH18X   CH18Y   CH20X   CH20Y   CH22X   CH22Y   CH24X    CH24Y   CH26X   CH26Y   CH28X   CH28Y   CH30X   CH30Y    CH32X   CH32Y   CH34X   CH34Y   CH36X   CH36Y   CH38X    CH38Y   CH40X   CH40Y   CH42X   CH42Y   CH44X   CH44Y    CH46X   CH46Y   CH48X   CH48Y   CH50X   CH50Y   CH52X    CH52Y   CH54X   CH54Y   CH56X   CH56Y     RST  CH18X    Manual operation  See         Channel  on page 50      SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer LLOBe  FREQuency    Frequency      Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the bottom viewed from  the air plane for the ILS LOC modulation signal     Parameters     Frequency   float    Range  60 to 120  Increment  0 03   RST  90    ILS Settings  Manual operation  See  Left Frequency  on 
151. e figure 9 1        Generating a GPS and    GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests       Fig  9 1  Example of test setup    The required steps are beyong the scope of this description  For details  see the  proposed reference descriptions     The first R amp S SMBV provides the second one with its system clock  trigger and fre   quency reference signals     Generating a GPS signal    To configure the instrument 1 to generate a GPS signal with 12 or more satellites  fol   low these general guidelines        For details  see R amp S SMBV Satellite Navigation operating manual     1     2  3   4    Select  Baseband  gt  GPS   Select  GPS  gt  Simulation Mode  gt  Auto Localization   Select  User Environment  gt  Vehicle Type  gt  Aircraft     Select  Localization Data   select  Waypoint Attitude File  and load a suitable      xtd file  describing the movement of airplane the DUT is installed in     Select  GPS    Navigation Data    Almanac  and select a suitable file     Generating a GPS        a GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests        Open the  GPS  gt  Real Time 5            to observe the current satellites constella   tion     7  Select  GPS  gt  State  gt  On   8  Select  RF  gt  State  gt  On     Generating a GBAS signal    To configure the instrument 2 to generate a GBAS signal  follow the steps described        To generate a GBAS signal for testing of correct message detection  on page 100    1  Configure the required reference location    2  Select    suitabl
152. e geographic north  and the connection line from beacon to airplane     TO  The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north  and the connection line from airplane to beacon      RST  FROM    Manual operation  See  Direction  on page 67    10 4 3 VOR COMIID Settings     ESOURCe hw gt  BBVOR COMIC CODE            erro beet teet                161  ESOURGE lt hwe  BB VOR COMIT DASE           ces          inte th        161   ESOURCe lt hw gt   BB VOR COMIG  DEP UM                    162                        BB  VOR COMIDO      pru eot              cette 162    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMId  FREQUENCY              162                                                                                 162    5           lt      gt                             0                        nnne ener 163  FSOURce lt shw gt  BB  VOR  COMI SYMB                    163   SOURce  hw   E BB VOR COMid  TSCHema                                                163    SOURce  hw    BB VOR COMId  STATe                eccentric 163            SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid CODE   Code     Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport      Parameters     Code   string    Manual operation  See  Code  on page 68      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR COMid DASH   Dash    Sets the length of a morse dash in seconds   Available only if     SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  COMid  TSCHema is set to USER     Parameters     Dash   float    Range  0
153. e marker signal at the marker outputs relative to the signal  generation start     Parameters     lt Delay gt  integer  Range  0 to 127   RST  0    Manual operation  See  Marker Delay  on page 93    Marker Settings GBAS      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MARKer lt ch gt  MODE   Mode   Sets the mode for the selected marker     Parameters    lt Mode gt  FPSTart   FP50P   PSTart              PRECeived  FPSTart  first pulse start  FP50  first pulse 50   PSTart  pulse start  P50  pulse 50   PRECeived  received pulse     RST  PSTart       Manual operation  See  Marker x  on page 92      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MARKer lt ch gt  PDELay     Queries the marker processing delay  internally measured value  This command is  avaliable only for  Marker 2      Return values    lt ProcessedDelay gt  float    Range  0 to 1  Increment  10E 9   RST  0    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Processing Delay  on page 94      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MARKer lt ch gt  WIDTh   Width      Sets the width of the corresponding marker in chips  0 05us      Parameters      Width   integer  Range  1 to 127   RST  10    Manual operation  See  Marker Width  on page 93    10 8 Marker Settings GBAS    Provided are the following commands       SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  MODE   Mode     Defines the signal for the selected marker output     Marker Settings GBAS    Parameters     lt Mode gt  PULSe   RESTart   PATTern   RATio   TRIGger   PPS   RST  PPS   Example  see example  Adjusting cl
154. e output signal with the frequencymo   dulated FM carrier  9960Hz  of the VOR signal    The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  SUBCarrier DEPTh    The frequency deviation can be set with     SOURce  hw      BB   VOR REFerence  DEViation       RST  NORM                   Manual operation  See  Mode  on page 66      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR PRESet    Sets all parameters to their default values   RST values specified for the commands           SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR STATe   State    Activates deactivates the VOR modulation     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON     RST  0    VOR System Configuration Settings     SOURCe lt hw gt   BBiVOR FREQUCRGCY                  158                 lt      gt                                                                  41 4                            ener rerit 158       6                 VOR                                                         158     5           lt        gt                                                                                        159  ESOURce  shw  EBB IVOR SUBCartrer DEPT        uiui        teer ture ita rne esed nc auras 159    5           lt        gt                                                                                                              160   SOURce  hw  E BBIVORIVAR PREQUGRGY                      160    VOR Settings    ESOURce lt hw gt        VOR VAR DEP                                                                 ra e e
155. e signal of the left lobe  90 Hz   and the right lobe  150 Hz      The DDM value in percent is calculated to formula    e  DDM Polarity  gt  90 Hz   150 Hz   default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz    AM  150 Hz      e  DDM Polarity  gt  150 Hz   90 Hz    DDM     AM 150 Hz    AM  90 Hz       A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB  and the value of the instrument current     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer          PCT on page 149       DDM   SDM Coupling  Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation  depths  SDM  see below       Fixed DDM  The absolute DDM values stays constant when the SDM is changed     System Configuration Settings Localizer     Coupled to The absolute DDM values changes when the SDM is changed  The  SDM  DDM value expressed in dB stays constant     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer DDM COUPling on page 147       5 3 3            Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the COM ID settings availa   ble for the ILS LOC modulation              1 020 ofktz       z        State  Enables disables an additional communication identification  COM ID  signal     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer COMid  STATe  on          147    Show Hide Details  Reveals the detailed setting options for the COM ID signal     Once the details are revealed  the labeling on the button changes to  Hide Details   
156. e time domain sched   uling of the VDB transmitters on the selected frequency  The transmisson is based  on TDMA and hence on one particular frequency you can allocate only one VDB  transmitter per one time slot  TS      For more information  see  Broadcast timing structure  on page 15     TSO  TS7   Enables the VDB in the corresponding time slot  TS     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  SCH TS lt st gt  STATe on page 119       Pow dB    Sets the relative power of a VDB per time slot  TS     See  Power settings  on page 17 for more information    Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  SCH TS lt st gt  POWer on page 119       4 4 Message Configuration Settings    To access this dialog    1  Select  GBAS  gt  Main dialog  gt  VDB Transmitters Configuration     2  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration    VDB      Data    Real GBAS Data   3  Select  Data Config    Msg  Config      Message Type 2    On    Message Type 4    On  Differential GNSS    On    Message Configuration Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the messages of each of    the VDB transmitters    4  Select  Message Configuration  gt  Message Type 2 4  gt  On  to enable configuration  of the particular message    5  Select  Message Configuration  gt  Differential GNSS  gt  On  to enable the load of a    file containing differential GBAS settings     4 4 1 Message Type 2 Parameters    The dialog comprises the parameters of messag
157. e type 2  according to RTCA  DO 246D  Table 2 14     Message type 2 carries information on the exact location for which the are referenced  as well as other GBAS related parameters     BE GBAS  YDB 1  Message Configuration mife es    Message Type 2          Message Type 2 parameters    Ground Station Reference Receivers     ref  receivers 7   Ground Station Accuracy Designator         Ground Station Continuity Integrity Designator            Local Magnetic Variation    1000  Degree      Sigma_vert_iono_gradient    0000 0000        gt    Refractivity Index       Scale Height                   Refractivity Uncertainty   0    Reference Location Configuration    Position Format  DEG MIN SEC         Altitude   Latitude   Longitude   Message Type 4    On  Differential GNSS    On       Provided are the following settings     Message Type 2  Enables you to configure the parameters of message type 2  according to RTCA  DO 246D  Table 2 14     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig MT2State               130       Message Configuration Settings    Ground Station Reference Receivers  Selects the number of the GNSS reference receivers installed in this system     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GSRReceivers on          126       Ground Station Accuracy Designator  Selects the letter designator indicating the minimum signal in space accuracy perform   ance provided by the ground station     Remote command     SOURce lt
158. each other  the R amp S SMBV has to start the reply pulse before the 50us reply delay  period has elapsed     Using the  Normalize Setup  calibration  an adjustment factor t is measured  This  adjustment factor is taken into account  when generating the reply pulses  The signal  output is started earlier to compensate for the trigger point of the sensor  This calibra   tion works best  when both stations use the same pulse shape with the same timing  characteristics     Adjustment  Factor t      gt                                                         Interrogation Reply Pulse  Pulse Pair              Adjustment  Factor t       Start of Pulse Output   1st Sample     Fig  7 3  Normalize setup    Normalize Setup  Available only if an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor is connected to the R amp S SMBV     Performs a normalization of the test setup  The delay due to the test setup is measured  and subsequently considered in the reply measurements     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis NORMalize                174             Power Sensor Adjustment Factor  Displays the power sensor adjustment factor determined during a normalization of the  setup     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis  PSAFactor       page 177          System Configuration Settings    Internal Adjustment Factor  Displays the internal adjustment factor  the mathematically calculated value of the time   when the pulse reaches its 50  level     Remote command     SOURce lt hw g
159. eduling 1  dialog  enable          TS1  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS1  gt  Pow dB    0 dB   b   TS3  gt  State  gt  On   relative power  TS3  gt  Pow dB     15 dB        TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  State  gt  Off    d   TS2 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8  gt  Pow dB     inf     8  Select  GBAS  gt  State  gt  On   9  Select  RF    State    On     The R amp S SMBV generates a single frequency signal  the VDB transmission is allo   cated on two time slots     51 and        with different relative power  see also exam   ple  Calculating the power per time slot in  Gated Power Mode  gt  On   on page 18    The signal is generated at physical layer and the bursts carry arbitrary data  PN9      10  In the R amp S SMBV  vary the relative power of TS3 and measure the received power  level at the VDB receiver   For example  to simulate conditions of weak signal  reduce the relative power down  to  60 dBm     11  Check whether the received signal is correcty decodded     The sensitvity level of the receiver is the level at that the receiver does not detect  any signal on TS3     9 3 Generating a GBAS Signal for VDB Slot Detection    The goal of VDB slot detection tests is to prove correct detection of all time slots from  which each VDB message was received     To generate a GBAS signal for slot detection tests  1  Press PRESET to set the R amp S SMBV to a definite state   2  Select  Staus Bar  gt  Frequency   110 MHz     3  Select  Baseband  gt  Avionics  gt  GBAS  and select  Multiple
160. ee naa ere ettet 160  FSOURCe lt hw gt   BB  VOR BANGE 2t loe naut                         160    5             lt      gt                                                               1 1 1  1244 44                                                              161      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR FREQuency  lt CarrierFreq gt        Sets the carrier frequency of the signal if     SOURce  hw            VOR  FREQuency   MODE is set to USER        Parameters    lt CarrierFreq gt  float    Range  100E3 to 6E9  Increment  0 01   RST  108e6    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency  on page 65      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR FREQuency MODE   Mode   Sets the frequency mode for the VOR modulation signal     Parameters     Mode   USER   ICAO     RST  USER    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency Mode  on page 65      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR ICAO CHANnel   Channel      Sets the ICAO channel i e   the VOR transmitting frequency if     SOURce  hw      BB   VOR                                is set to CAO  The RF frequency is set to the value selected  here        Parameters    lt Channel gt     Manual operation     VOR Settings    CH17X   CH17Y   CH19X   CH19Y       21     CH21Y   CH23X    CH23Y       25     CH25Y   CH27X   CH27Y       29     CH29Y    CH31X   CH31Y                CH33Y   CH35X   CH35Y   CH37X    CH37Y   CH39X   CH39Y   CH41X   CH41Y                CH43Y          5     CH45Y   CH47X   CH47Y   CH49X   CH49Y   CH51X    CH51Y   CH53X   CH53Y   CH55X   CH55Y   CH57X   CH57Y  
161. ematically calculated value of the time  when the pulse  reaches its 50  level  Query the internal adjustment factor with     SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis IAFactor     PSENsor   The during a normalization setup measured adjustment factor   Query the power sensor adjustment factor with      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis  PSAFactor      RST  INTernal             Manual operation  See  Used Adjustment Factor  on page 84    DME COMIID Settings   LSOURce lt shw gt  BB  DME ID  CODE      178  ESOURCe  shwP   BB DME ID DASH                                 tone iare aA 178   300                gt                               err                179   SOURceshw  EBB DMEB EETTer                                  179  ESOURce  shw   t       DME ID PPPESTAT 6          179   SOURceshw   rBBIDME ID BPBS          fionar                                 180  SOURCES W   BR      ID PEROU                               180   SOURCe lt hw gt   BB DMEAD PRES  tic                 180  ESOURceshw  TBBIDME3DIRAEE     ctia                       ka                              180   SOURce lt hw gt   BBIDMEND SYMBOl                         180   SOURce  hw  EBBIDMEZJB TSGCH6m3a        2 22 2                   181  FSOURCeshwWe                STATE                181                        SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID CODE   Code      Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g  MUC for the Munich airport      Parameters     Code   string    Manua
162. ement window   tus                                      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis STATe on          176       Expected Reply Delay  Sets the expected reply delay     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis GATE EDELay      page 173          Gate Length  Sets the gate length for the measurement window     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis GATE  LENGth  on          174       Measurement Time  Sets the time for the measurement cycle     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis GATE COUNt on page 173          Peak Level   Indicates the measured average peak level of all pulse pairs in a measurement cycle   Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DHE  ANALysis                   page 175      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis  POWer  OK  on page 175                   Range Distance   Indicates the measured average range distance of all valid pulse pairs in a measure   ment cycle  If there are no valid measurements available in the set measurement win   dow  invalid  is indicated    Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  ANALysis RDIStance                176       System Configuration Settings    Reply Delay   Indicates the measured average reply delay of all valid pulse pairs         measurement  cycle  If there are no valid measurements available in the set measurement window     invalid    is indicated    Remote command      SO0URce  hw     BB DME ANALysis  TIME                176    SOURce  hw    BB D
163. ency channels    The VHF data broadcast is defined for carrier frequencies within the range of 108 025  MHz to 117 975 MHz and carrier spacing of 25 0 kHz     The R amp S SMBV supports the whole requred frequency range  you can modulate the  VHF signal on any one of these carrier frequencies  Moreover  this firmware option  supports two frequency allocation modes  a single frequency and a multiple frequency  transmission     Wenn you chose the frequency allocation mode  consider the follwoing        Single frequency mode is suitable to simulate the signal of up to eight VDB trans   mitters modulated on the same carrier frequency   The signal calculation is fast and optimized for time sensitive applications   This mode is also the choice if the DUT or the analyzing equipment supports single  band decoding        Multiple frequency channels mode is suitable to allocate the VDB transmitters to  up to 8 out of 11 adjacent frequency channels   The generated signal is optimized for reduced adjacent and co channel interfer   ence to neighboring systems  The setting time  however  increase significantly  compared to the single frequency mode     Center frequency MHz   109 875 109 900 109 925 109 950 109 975 110 000 110 025 110 050 110 075 110 100 110 125        25 4 3  2 A 0 1 2 3 4 5  Frequency Number    The frequency related settings are split into several dialogs  To allocate the VDB in the  frequency domain  set the central frequency   Status Bar  gt  Frequency    define the fre 
164. ent  100E 9   RST  10E 6    Manual operation  See  Gate Length  on          78      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis GATE TIME  lt MeasurementTime gt   Sets the DME analysis measurement time     Parameters    lt MeasurementTime gt  float    Range  0 1 to 20  Increment  0 1   RST  1      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis NORMalize     Performs a normalization of the test setup  The delay due to the test setup is measured  and subsequently considered in the reply measurements     DME Settings    Return values    lt Normalize gt  0 1  OFF                       Query only    Manual operation  See  Normalize Setup  on page 83            SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis POWer     Queries the measured average peak level of all valid pulse pairs in a measurement    cycle    Return values     lt Power gt  float  Range   200 to 200  Increment  0 01   RST  0   Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Peak Level  on page 78                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis POWer 0K     Queries if there are peak level measurement values available in the set measurement  window     Return values      lt Ok gt  0 1 OFF         RST  1  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Peak Level  on page 78      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis PRRate    Queries the measured mean pulse repetition rate of the DME ground station  All  received pulses of the DME ground station are considered    Return values     lt Rate gt  float    Range  0 to 10000  Increment  0 1   RST 
165. eply delay   DME             15                             ei eaa 78  Expected Reply delay  analysis   DME IDterrogatlor                                       78      PAS data          ET Mee PER        35  FAS lateral alert limit   approach status                              39  FAS RPDS or continuation link Pes  FAS vertical alert limit approach status                               39  FASLAL          nie                39  FASVAL                  39           Filter Parameter       Filter Type                 Filtering  Clipping Settings               42  Final approach segment  FAS          s 39  Fix marker delay to current range                                       91  Flight Path Alignment Point  FPAP                                     38  Fly    ILS Glide slope  ILS Localizer       Frequency  IES EOC ANZ OR ered EP 58  ILS  Marker BEACONS             n t rhe 61  VOR em 68  Frequency                         venere         28  Frequency  single multiple  Advantages       IR      15  G  Gate length                                     rcr      78  Gate length  analysis           interrogatiort                                            78  GBAS differential file                     42  Settings vastis 4 30        GBAS               2 28                                                                              32  Generate   Waveform                         Glide                      rrr rrr rrr mr es  Global Trigger Clock Settings                                    
166. er lt ch gt  MODE on page 188          Marker Width  Sets the width of the corresponding marker     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME MARKer lt ch gt  WIDTh on page 188       Marker Delay  Defines the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs relative to the sig   nal generation start     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  MARKer  ch     DELay               187          Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 93    Clock Settings    Processing Delay   Displays the processing delay  the delay between the position of the markers for the  interrogation pulse and the corresponding marker positions for the reply pulse  when   Marker 2  is set to  Received Pulse      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME MARKer lt ch gt   PDELay  on page 188             8 4 Clock Settings    To access this dialog  select  GBAS  gt  Clock      ILS  gt  Clock      VOR  gt  Clock      DME   gt  Clock         This dialog provides access to the settings necessary to select and configure the clock  signal  like the clock source and clock mode     Clock Settings        Multiple Sample  j    4    Measured External Clock 6                         for R amp S SMBV only     Selects the synchronization mode     This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signals of  several connected R amp S SMBVs     Note  If several instruments are connected  the connecting cables from the master  instrument to the slave one and between each two consec
167. es   Range  0 to 90   RST  0   lt LatitudeMin gt  integer    Defines the latitude minutes     Range  0 to 59   RST  0    GBAS Settings     lt LatitudeSec gt  float  Defines the latitude seconds     Range  0 to 59 999  Increment  0 001     RST  0   lt LatitudeDir gt  NORTh   SOUTh  Defines the latitude direction    RST  NORT  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  L TP FTP Location Configuration       page 37                              SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LFLocation HEIGht  lt LfHeight gt   Sets the LTP FTP height     Parameters    lt LfHeight gt  float  Range   512 to 6041 5  Increment  0 1   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Plan View Profile View Parameters  on page 36                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LMVariation  lt Lmv gt     Sets the local magnetic variation     Parameters    lt Lmv gt  float  A positive value represents an east variation  clockwise from  true north   Range   180 to 180  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Default unit  deg  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Local Magnetic Variation  on page 32    GBAS Settings         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LOCation COORdinates DECimal   lt Longitude gt    lt Latitude gt    lt Altitude gt     Defines
168. f the Morse code  dash  length  symbol space and letter space    For selected user time scheme  all length  parameters of the code can be set independently  If no coding is entered  the COM ID  tone is sent uncoded  key down      The following values are default values   o    Adot   hasa tone duration of 100 ms     Adash   has a tone duration of 300ms  e The time between two tones is 100ms      The time between two letters is 300ms  After each word a word space is entered  The word repetition rate is 7 words minute     As the word length can vary between 900 ms and 4500 ms the word space between  the words varies accordingly     Example   ID code             The word length     300 100 300  300  100 100 100 100 300  300  300 100 100 100 300 100 1  00    3100 ms    Table 1 1  Morse Code                      Letter Morse Code Letter Morse Code  A N   B                         E                                lt    lt                                    ICAO Channel Frequencies       Morse Code Letter Morse Code    Letter                         A 2 ICAO Channel Frequencies       2 1         the following chapter the standardized transmitting frequencies for the ILS  DME         VOR standards are listed     ILS Channel Frequencies    The individual values in the table are       Ch  No    ICAO channel number      LOC Freq    ILS Localizer transmitting frequency  MHz       GS Freq    ILS GS frequency  MHz    Table 1 2  Standardized ILS GS and ILS LOC transmitting frequencies  MHz  
169. ferential  GBAS information  The differential GBAS file must have the extension   rs gbas and  file format as described in chapter A 4 2   GBAS Differential File Format     on page 203    Use the  Predefined Files  fuction  to load a predefined file    Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  DG  PREDefined CATalog    on page 123    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  DG  USER  CATalog  on page 123    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG  PREDefined  FILE   on page 123      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  DG  USER  FILE on page 123    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  DG  FILE  on page 124                                           Predefined Files  Access a list with predefined files     4 5 Filter Clipping Settings    To access this dialog     1  Select  Main dialog    Multiple Frequency Channels    Off      Filter Clipping Settings    2  Select  Main dialog  gt  Filter Clipping Settings           GBAS  Filter Clipping Settings              Modulation Settings  Modulation Type D8PSK  Sample Rate Variation   10 500 000  kHz        Clipping          On    100        Vector li jql S      The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the baseband filter and  to enable clipping  as well as information on the applied modulation type and sam   ple rate     4 5 1 Filter Settings    Selection and configuration of baseband filter is enabled in single freqency mode  i e    Multi
170. float   Defines the latitude seconds     Range  0 to 59 999  Increment  0 001     RST  0   lt LatitudeDir gt  NORTh   SOUTh  Defines the latitude direction    RST  NORT  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Delta FPAP Location Configuration       page 38                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG STATe  lt DiffGnssState gt   Enables the use of differential GNSS data     Parameters    lt DiffGnssState gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    GBAS Settings  Manual operation  See  Differential GNSS  on page 42      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG PREDefined CATalog     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG USER CATalog     Queries the names of the existing user defined predefined GBAS differential files   Per default  the instrument stores user defined files in the  var user  directory  Use    the command MMEM  CDIRectory to change the default directory to the currently used  one        Only files with extension   rs_gbas are listed     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format  detection  on page 111    Usage  Query only  Manual operation  See           Differential File     on page 42      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DG PREDefined FILE   Filename    Loads the selected predeifned file  extension      xs               Setting
171. for 60 us    dead time  to  ensure that it does not trigger again to its own transmitted reply  The receiver is there   fore not ready to process new interrogation pulses until the reply double pulse has  been fully transmitted  All pulse interrogations that are received at the DME ground sta   tion during the dead time are not answered  This ensures that the gap between two  consecutive pulses is always at least 60 us     A reply pulse is sent after a defined delay time after a valid interrogation pulse has  been received     General Settings    4 GBAS Configuration and Settings     gt       access the GBAS settings  select  Baseband  gt  Avionics  gt  GBAS      The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 10 2    GBAS Settings   on page 110     41 General Settings    This dialog provides access to the default and the  Save Recall  settings  as well as to  the general settings of the option and the dialogs with further cinfiguration settings  The  dialog dispalys an indication of the selected key parameters                  GBAS ig xl    Set To Default   Save Recall       Data List Management      Generate Waveform File         SCATI    On    Multiple Frequency Channels   On  Gated Power Mode     On  Sample Rate Variation 10 5 kHz    VDB Transmitters Configuration       Filter Clipping Settings      Cosine   Clip Off  Trigger Marker      Auto    Clock      Internal        State   Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital s
172. ger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed Retrigger   stops the signal generation  until subsequent trigger event occurs     Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger ARM EXECute               182    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger ARM EXECute      page 182       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger ARM  EXECute               182    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 182                      Clock     Accesses the dialog for selecting the clock source  see chapter 8 4   Clock Settings    on page 94     5 2 System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope    To access this dialog   1  Select  ILS Component    Glide slope    2  Select  ILS    System Configuration      5 2 1 Signal Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the ILS Glide slope  ILS GS   modulation signal     User Defined  334 700 000 000  MHz       90 Hz   150 Hz    90 0  Hz 7        0 00 fdeg 7    Carrier Frequency Mode  Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal      User Defined  Activates user defined variation of the carrier frequency     System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope     ICAO  Activates variation in predefined steps according to the standardized  ILS GS transmitting frequencies  see chapter A 2 1   ILS Channel  Frequencies   on page 195   The start value can be selected in the  field  ICAO Channel  below   The selection is effective on both ILS modulations  A change to mod   ulation ILS GS automatically causes the RF frequency
173. gnal content  of the ILS GS signal     The modulation depth of the 90 Hz signal results from the settings of  the parameters Sum of Depth  SDM  and DDM Depth according to     e  Fly  gt  Down   AM 90 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100      e  Fly  gt  Up   AM 90 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100      System Configuration Settings   Glide Slope       150 Hz  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the lower lobe signal  component  150 Hz signal content  of the ILS GS signal   The modulation depth of the 150 Hz signal results from the settings of  parameters Sum of Depth  SDM  and DDM Depth according to   e  Fly  gt  Down   AM  150 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100              gt               150 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100    Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   MODE on          143       Up Frequency   Sets the modulation frequency of the upper antenna lobe    Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope    ULOBe  FREQuency  on page 144       Down Frequency  Sets the modulation frequency of the lower antenna lobe     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope    LLOBe  FREQuency       page 143          Up Down Phase   Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and lower antenna lobe   The zero crossing of the lower lobe  150  2  signal serves as a reference  The angle  refers to the period of the signal of the lower antenna lobe     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope    PHASe on page 143       
174. gnal for Receiver Sensitivity Tests                                       98    9 3  9 4  9 5    10  10 1  10 2  10 2 1  10 2 2  10 2 3  10 2 4  10 2 5  10 2 6   10 3  10 3 1  10 3 2  10 3 3  10 3 4   10 4  10 4 1  10 4 2  10 4 3   10 5  10 5 1  10 5 2  10 5 3  10 5 4   10 6   10 7   10 8   10 9             2    Generating    GBAS Signal for VDB Slot                                                                     99  Generating    GBAS Signal for Message Format Detection                                   100  Generating a GPS and a GBAS Signal for Multi Mode Receiver Tests                 101  Remote Control                                                                 106  Primary Settings               rene tima rait i kir cse           107  GBAS ESJdupoe                                  110  Programming                                                  nenne nenne 110  General Settings                  115  VDB Transmission Configuration                                  116  Scheduling                                       119  Message                        2                   120  Filter  Clipping  Modulation           05                              136  ILS             5                        139  General                                                               139  ILS Glide Slope                                                                  nnne 139  IES Eocalizer Settings    ise aeri cett              144  ILS Marker Beacon                       eene 1
175. gt   BB GBAS TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut   Output      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut   Output      Enables disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event     Parameters     lt Output gt  0 1  OFF               The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external  trigger event but because of the instrument s processing time  the first samples are cut off and no signal is outputted  After  elapsing of the internal processing time  the output signal is syn   chronous to the trigger event     OFF   The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time  and starts with sample 0  i e  the complete signal is outputted   This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequen   ces with signal duration comparable with the processing time of  the instrument      RST  1    Avionics Standards Remote Control Commands     _          ____  _ SSS eee eee eee    Manual operation  See  Sync  Output to External Trigger  on page 87      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger OBASeband DELay   Delay     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OBASeband DELay   Delay     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  TRIGger OBASeband DELay   Delay     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger OBASeband DELay  lt Delay gt     The command specifies the trigger delay  expressed as a number of samples  for trig   gering by the trigger signal from the second path     Parameters     lt Delay gt  float  Range  0 samples to 2432 1 samples  Increment  1 sa
176. he screen  such as  ments  dialog boxes  menus  options  buttons  and softkeys are enclosed by    quotation marks                    KEYS Key names are written in capital letters    File names  commands  File names  commands  coding samples and screen output are distin    program code guished by their font    Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics    Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font     References  References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota   tion marks              1 4 Notes on Screenshots    When describing the functions of the product  we use sample screenshots  These  screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and  possible interdependencies between parameters  The shown values may not represent  realistic test situations     The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product  that is  with all options instal   led  Thus  some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par   ticular product configuration     2 Welcome to the Avionics Options    The GBAS Option    The R amp S SMBV K111 is a firmware application that adds functionality to generate sig   nals in accordance with the Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS      The most important R amp S SMBV K111 features at a glance     e Generation of the VHF Data Broadcast  VDB  Signal in Space signal transmitted  from the Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS  ground subsystem to the  ai
177. hw gt    BB  DME  TRIGger  ARM  EXECute on          182    Running Stopped  For enabled modulation  displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes     Trigger Settings    e  Running   The signal is generated  a trigger was  internally or externally  initiated in triggered  mode    e  Stopped   The signal is not generated and the instrument waits for a trigger event     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger   RMODe  on page 184    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger RMODe  on page 184     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  TRIGger  RMODe  on page 184    SOURce  hw      BB  DME  TRIGger  RMODe  on page 184             Execute Trigger  Executes trigger manually     You can execute the trigger manually only if you select an internal trigger source and a  trigger mode other than  Auto      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       B GBAS TRIGger EXECute      page 183  B ILS TRIGger EXECute on page 183  B  VOR  TRIGger EXECute on page 183  B  DME  TRIGger EXECute on page 183       UJ    UJ                            Trigger Source  Selects trigger source  This setting is effective when a trigger mode other than  Auto   has been selected        Internal   The trigger event is executed by  Execute Trigger         External   The trigger event is the active edge of an external trigger signal  supplied at the  TRIGGER connector     Use the  Global Trigger Clock Settings  dialog to define the pola
178. ibution                         32    Standard settings  State  DME            D   DME analysis                                                      ILS Localizer   ILS Marker BEACONS       61   VDB  settings                 28   VOR          24  47  63  67  70  State  analysis   DME IDtferrogatlOri      encre eet 77  Station Slot Identifier                28  Subcarrier depth   VOR modulation                66  Subcarrier frequency   VOR                                     66  Sum of depth   ILS Glide  Slope inris aa s 52   ILS                 56  Symbol space   WES HOCANIZOR ien pt hii eerte na e 59  Sync  output to external trigger                                           87  Synchronization mode           94  Synchronous signal generation                                         102    System configuration  DME             Goebel ash         71                       T  TAP data set   State                             39  TAP lateral alert limit   status          41  TAP vertical alert limit   status         41             2             41  TAPVAL         41  gre                             36  TDMA timing   PHIM GI p ES 16   Settings as  Threshold crossing height    rrt enne 36  Time domain allocation   Principle  2                           ug ib      16   fuper 30  Time schema   IES LocaliZer                                 59   IES Marker Beacons               62                                 68      30  Trigger                         90            E                
179. ics Standards About the Avionics Options       3 About the Avionics Options    The following topics summarize some background information on the related avionics  standards  The provided overview information is intended as explanation of the used  terms and does not aim to be comprehensive     Brief overview of the avionics standards       Landing systems  ILS  Instrument Landing System   MLS  Microwave Landing  System   Landing systems are ground based approach systems that provides precision  guidance to an aircraft approaching and  blind  landing on a runway        Radio Flight navigation systems  VOR  VHF Omnidirectional Radio   DME  Dis   tance measuring equipment   TACAN  Tactical Air Navigation   ADF  Automatic  Direction Finder    The radio navigation systems are aircraft systems that support the pilots to deter   mine the aircraft positions and stay on course  These systems are more and more  obsolete  However  due to security reasons  these flight navigation systems are still  in use     e Radar systems  RSR  EnRoute Surveillance Radar   ASR  Airport Surveillance  Radar   PAR  Precision Approach Radar   ASDE  Airport Surface Detection Equip   ment   SSR  Secondary Surveillance Radar    Radar systems are divided into two groups  primary  RSR  ASR  PAR and ASDE   and secondary  SSR   The radar systems are used in air traffic control to mainly  detects and measures the position of aircraft  i e  its range and bearing     3 1 The Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS  
180. id TSCHema  lt Tschema gt   Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     In the standard time schema  STD  the set dot length determines the dash length     three times the dot length  whereas in the user time schema  USER  all length param   eters can be set independently     Parameters    lt Tschema gt  STD   USER     RST  STD    Manual operation  See  Time Schema  on page 62    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid  STATe    State   Switches on  off the addittional COM ID signal     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON     RST  0    Manual operation  See  State  on page 61      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon FREQuency  lt CarrierFreq gt   Sets the carrier frequency for the ILS MB modulation signal     Parameters    lt CarrierFreq gt  float    Range  100E3 to 6E9  Increment  0 01   RST  75E6    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency  on page 60      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon FREQuency MODE   Mode    Sets the carrier frequency mode of the ILS MB modulation signal     Parameters    lt Mode gt  USER   PREDefined     RST  USER    Manual operation  See  Carrier Frequency Mode  on page 60      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS MBEacon MARKer FREQuency   Frequency     Sets the modulation frequency of the marker signal for the ILS MB modulation signal     Parameters     lt Frequency gt  integer  Range  400 to 3000   RST  0    Manual operation  See  Marker Frequency  on page 60      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon  MARKer  DEPTh   Depth     Sets the modulat
181. ide    The Quick Start Guide is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF for   mat on the Documentation CD ROM  It provides the information needed to set up and  start working with the instrument  Basic operations and an example of setup are descri   bed  The manual includes also general information          Safety Instructions     Operating Manuals    The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide  Operating Manuals  are provided for the base unit and each additional  software  option     These manuals are available in PDF format   in printable form   on the Documentation  CD ROM delivered with the instrument  In the Operating Manual for the base unit  all  instrument functions are described in detail  Furthermore  it provides an introduction to  remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with pro   gramming examples  Information on maintenance  instrument interfaces and error  messages is also given     In the individual option manuals  the specific functions of the option are described in  detail  For additional information on default settings and parameters  refer to the data  sheets  Basic information on operating the R amp S 5       is not included in the option  manuals     Service Manual    The Service Manual is available in PDF format   in printable form   on the Documenta   tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument  It describes how to check compliance with  rated specifications  on instrument function  
182. iguration Settings    7 2 4 DME Analysis    The settings in this dialog are available only if an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor is con   nected to the R amp S SMBV    1       access this dialog    2  Select  DME  gt  DME Mode  gt  Interrogation     3  Select  System Configuration  gt  DME Analysis           DME Analysis      xl    Measurement Gate Settings       The  DME Analyisis  dialog comprises the settings to configure the parameters of  the reply signal of the ground station transponder     State  Activates the DME analysis  The R amp S SMBV generates interrogation pulse pairs and  starts an internal counter for time measurement     The measurement gate settings determine the measurement window  expected reply  delay     gate length 2   Only reply pulses for which the 50  voltage point of the rising  edge of the first pulse is within the measurement window are used to evaluate the  delay time and reply efficiency  The delay measurement is averaged within the mea   surement cycle  The reply efficiency is calculated once for each measurement cycle     System Configuration Settings    Example     The gate length is 1 us and the expected reply delay is 50 us  The measurement win   dow lies in the range between 49 5 and 50 5 us  Only pulse pairs are used for the mea   surement whose 50  voltage point of the rising edge of the first pulse is within this  range    Gate length 2    Expected reply delay   50us  0 5us                           gt     te  Dus 49 508 50 Sus    Measur
183. ing a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111  Usage  Event    GBAS Settings    Manual operation  See  Append  Insert  Delete  on page 29            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  DELete  Deletes the selected VDB     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111  Usage  Event    Manual operation  See  Append  Insert  Delete  on page 29               SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  STATe  lt VState gt   Enables the selected VHF Data Broadcast  VDB  transmiter     Parameters     lt VState gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  1   Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for VDB slot detection   on page 111    Manual operation  See  State  on page 28                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  GID  lt Gld gt   Sets the GBAS ID     Parameters     lt Gld gt  string  A four character  24 bit  alphanumeric field that identifies the  ground station broadcasting the message   Permited are capital letter  numbers and  space     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  GBAS ID  on page 28      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  SSID  lt Ssid gt   Sets the Station Slot Identifier SSID of the of the ground station     Parameters    lt Ssid gt  A B C D JE F G H   RST  A  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  SSID  on page 28    GBAS Settings   
184. ings  dialog    This setting can be used for testing the symbol rate tolerance     The RTCA DO 246D specification defines a symbol rate of the GBAS data broadcast  as 10500 symbols sec  Because of the used modulation  see Modulation Type   each  symbol defines one of eight states  This results in a nominal bit rate of 31500 bits s     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  MSET  SRATe  on page 138     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  SRIN  o  on          116          VDB Transmitters Configuration  Access the  VDB Transmitters Configuration  dialog  see chapter 4 2   VDB Transmit   ters Configuration Settings   on page 27     Filter   Clipping  Access to the dialog for setting baseband filtering  clipping and modulation  see chap   ter 4 5   Filter Clipping Settings   on page 42     Trigger Marker   Accesses the dialog for selecting the trigger source  for configuring the marker signals  and for setting the time delay of an external trigger signal  see chapter 8 1   Trigger  Settings        page 85 and chapter 8 2   Marker Settings GBAS   on page 90     The currently selected trigger source is displayed to the right of the button     Execute Trigger  Executes trigger manually     You can execute the trigger manually only if you select an internal trigger source and a  trigger mode other than  Auto     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS TRIGger EXECute on          183      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  TRIGger EXECute on page 183      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  
185. ion depth of the marker signal for the ILS MB signal     VOR Settings    Parameters    lt Depth gt  float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  95    Manual operation  See  Marker Depth  on page 60    10 4 VOR Settings       The BB  VOR subsystem contains all commands for configuring a VOR signal     See also chapter 10 6   Trigger Settings    on page 181 and chapter 10 9   Clock Set   tings   on page 191 for a description of the trigger and clock settings     10 4 1 VOR General Settings    ESOURCO  hiwe BB VOR MODE                                                        156   SOURce  shw    BB VOR PRESSL        eire hace cede      rie tarot aene          a nep      157  ESOURGeshwerBBNOR S DAT    tcc oe tarte ett        ctt                        157      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR MODE   Mode     Sets the operating mode for the VOR modulation signal     10 4 2    VOR Settings    Parameters     lt Mode gt  NORM   VAR   SUBCarrier   FMSubcarrier  NORM  VOR modulation is active   VAR    Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the variable sig   nal component  30Hz signal content  of the VOR signal    The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  VAR  DEPTH     SUBCarrier   Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated  FM carrier  9960Hz  of the VOR signal    The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with      SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  SUBCarrier  DEPTh   FMSubcarrier   Amplitude modulation of th
186. it on page 184       SOURce lt hw gt    BB  VOR  TRIGger  OBASeband  INHibit on          184       SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  TRIGger  OBASeband  INHibit on          184          8 2 Marker Settings GBAS    The marker settings are available only for option R amp S SMBV K111 GBAS      This dialog provides access to the settings necessary to select and configure the  marker output signal  like the marker mode or marker delay settings     On Off Ratio  Off Time   1  Samples       Marker Delay          Current Range Without Recalculation                                            1 300                                 0    2000 Samples                          2 2000 Samples                     0    2000 Samples  Fix Marker Delay To Current Range          Marker Mode   Marker configuration for up to two marker channels  The settings are used to select the  marker mode defining the shape and periodicity of the markers  The contents of the  dialog change with the selected marker mode  the settings are self explanatory      PPS  Marker signal for every start of second     Marker Settings GBAS     Pulse  Regular marker signal   Enter a divider to define the clock frequency  The software derives  the frequency by dividing the sample rate by this divider  the dialog  indicates the resulting pulse frequency    Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut  ch    PULSe  DIVider on page 189      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt   PULSe  FREQuency    on 
187. ition frequency   DME analysis    rerit remettre 79  Pulse Repetition Frequency   DME Modulation                  79  Pulse repetition frequency  analysis   DME interrogatiort               79  Pulse repetition rate   DME interrogation    ne rrr 74  Pulse repetition rate trigger   DME interrogatio    2  err rrr nn teen 74  Pulse rise   DME         T 76  Pulse shape                 od      te cee 75  Pulse spacing   pe 76  Pulse squitter   DME interrogation        73  Pulse width   prre 76  R  Radar systems   OVEIVICW  xcci cient      e                 13  Radio navigation systems                       dock        oaths      13  Range distance   DME                       mere rena        78                                                78                                                       73  Real Data   COMIQUT ATION                               28  Reference location configuration                                         33  Reference path data selector                                                       37                   M            40  Reference path ID          e              40  Reference path identifier                                         37  IRefractivity  Index uc        Dd a etia renes 32  Refractivity uncertainty              32  Repetition rate   DME interrogation              74  Repetition rate trigger   DME interrogation                       tem tees 74  Reply delay                                       79   DMEnterrogatiom           tne e ote    
188. ity that the application  provides  including remote control operation     All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base software and  are described in the R amp S SMBV operating manual  The latest version is available for  download at the product homepage     Installation    You can find detailed installation instructions in the delivery of the option or in the  R amp S SMBV Service Manual     Accessing the Avionics Dialog    To open the dialog with Avionics settings       Inthe block diagram of the R amp S SMBV  select  Baseband  gt  Avionic Standards   gt    GBAS  ILS  DME    VOR      A dialog box opens that displays the provided general settings of the selected  standard     The signal generation is not started immediately  To start signal generation with the  default settings  select  State  gt  On      Scope    2 2 Scope    Tasks  in manual or remote operation  that are also performed in the base unit in the  same way are not described here     In particular  this includes        Managing settings and data lists  i e  storing and loading settings  creating and  accessing data lists  accessing files in a particular directory  etc        Information on regular trigger  marker and clock signals as well as filter settings  if  appropriate       General instrument configuration  such as configuring networks and remote opera   tion     Using the common status registers    For a description of such tasks  see the R amp S SMBV operating manual     Avion
189. l operation  See  Code  on page 81               SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID DASH   Dash       Sets the length of a morse dash in seconds     DME Settings    Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt           DME  ID TSCHema is set to USER     Parameters    lt Dash gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Dash Length  on page 82            SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID DOT   Dot    Sets the length of a morse dot in seconds  If the time schema is set to STD the length  of the dash  3xdot   symbol space   dot  and letter space   3xdot  is also determined  by this entry    Parameters     lt Dot gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Dot Length  on page 81            SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID LETTer   Letter   Sets the length of a letter space in seconds     Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  ID  TSCHema is set to USER        Parameters     Letter  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 3    Manual operation  See  Letter Space       page 82                                    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID PPP  STATe   lt PairOfPulsePair gt     Sets the state of the pair of pulse pairs for the ID signal generation  When enabled a  pair of pulse pairs is transmitted during the set     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  ID  RATE                 Parameters     PairOfPulsePair   0   1   OFF   ON       5    0    Manual operation  See  Pair of Pulse Pairs                80    DME Set
190. le  the file extension is  however predefined     Remote command     subsystem   SETTing CATalog      page 108   lt subsystem gt           1                       page 109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing              FAST on page 109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing  LOAD               109    subsystem   SETTing DELete on          108       System Configuration  Accesses the  System Configuration  dialog for configuration of the VOR modulation   see chapter 6 2   System Configuration Settings   on page 65     Trigger Marker      Accesses the dialog for selecting the trigger source  for configuring the marker signals  and for setting the time delay of an external trigger signal  see chapter 8 1   Trigger  Settings   on page 85     The currently selected trigger source is displayed to the right of the button     Execute Trigger  Executes trigger manually     You can execute the trigger manually only if you select an internal trigger source and a  trigger mode other than  Auto      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger EXECute on page 183    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS TRIGger EXECute on page 183    SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  TRIGger EXECute               183    SOURce  hw      BB  DME  TRIGger EXECute on page 183                      Arm  For trigger modes  Armed Auto  and  Armed                      stops the signal generation  until subsequent trigger event occurs     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger ARM EXECute      page 182      SOURce lt hw gt
191. lect the data source for the VDB     The following standard data sources are available         All O  All 1    An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data   e              An internally generated pseudo random noise sequence       Pattern     An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern   Use the  Pattern  box to define the bit pattern   e  Data List Select DList   A binary data from a data list  internally or externally generated   Select  Select DList  to access the standard  Select List  dialog       Select the  Select Data List  gt  navigate to the list file   dm         gt  Select  to  select an existing data list            Transmitters Configuration Settings        Use the  New  and  Edit  functions to create internally new data list or to edit  an existing one        Use the standard  File Manager  function to transfer external data lists to the  instrument    See also  Main Dialog  gt  Data List Management       Real GBAS Data   Enables you to configure the content of the GBAS messages   Select  Data Config  gt  Config   to access the provided settings     Remote command      SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt   DATA on page 118    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt   DATA  DSELection on page 118    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     DATA  PATTern on          119          App  Data Length bytes  Sets the application data length     For  Data Data Config    Real GBAS Data  the value of the application data length is  not v
192. local level  plane   FPAP   Flight Path Alignment Point  point at the end of the runway that in conjunction with the LTP FTP  defines the geodesic plane of the precision final approach  landing and flight path    TCH 7 Threshold Crossing Height   GAP   Glide Path Angle  angle at the        that describes the intended angle of descent at the final  approach path     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON  ig  FDSState on page 124       Plan View Profile View Parameters     FAS Data Set  The following parameters define the approach path  see also figure 4 1       Glide Path Angle     Sets the angle of the FAS path  glide path  with respect to the hori   zontal plane tangent to the WGS84 ellipsoid at the LTP FTP     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON   ig  GPANgl1e on page 126     TCH  Sets the threshold crossing height  TCH    that is the height of the  FAS path above the LTP FTP defined in either feet or meters    Remote command      SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig ATCHeight on page 120     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig ATUSelector on page 120     LTP FTP Height   Sets the height of the LTP FTP above the WGS84 ellipsoid     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     MCON  fig LFLocation HEIGht    on page 128          Message Configuration Settings    Airport ID     FAS Data Set  Sets the airport identification as three or four alphanumeric characters used to desig   nate air
193. ls in a period  ON time   OFF time  for marker RATio    Parameters     lt OffTime gt  integer  Range  1 to 16777215   RST  1   Example  see example  Adjusting clock  marker and trigger settings   on page 113    Manual operation  See  Marker Mode  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  DELay  lt Delay gt     Sets the marker delay     Parameters    lt Delay gt  float  Range  0 to 16777215  Increment  1E 3   RST  0  Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut1 DELay                 Manual operation  See  Marker x Delay  on page 91      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  DELay MINimum     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  DELay MAXimum     Queries the minimum maximum marker delay for fixed marker delay setting     Return values         lt Maximum gt  float   Range  0 to max   Increment  1E 3    RST  2000  Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS  TRIGger  OUTPut1  DELay         1          Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Marker x Delay  on page 91      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut DELay FlXed   Fixed      Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range     10 9    Clock Settings    Parameters    lt Fixed gt  0 1  OFF                 0                  SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut1  DELay  FIXed              Manual operation  See  Marker x Delay  on page 91    Clock Settings     SOURceshw     BEI DME CLOCK MODE                                    191   SOURcCe lt hw gt   BB GBAS CLOCKIMODE              
194. lt LatitudeDir gt  NORTh   SOUTh   Defines the latitude direction     RST  NORT    Altitude   float   Defines the height above the ellipsoid  HAE  altitude     Range   83886 07 to 83886 07  Increment  0 01   RST  0    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format  detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Reference Location Configuration  on page 33                                 SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig MT2State  lt Mt2State gt     Enables the message type 2 configuration     Parameters    lt Mt2State gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Message Type 2  on page 31                                          SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig MT4State  lt Mt4State gt     Enables the configuration of message type 4     GBAS Settings    Parameters    lt Mt4State gt  0 1 OFF ON   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Message Type 4  on page 34                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig NOPPoint  lt Nofp gt     Queries the number of path points   N     Parameters    lt Nofp gt  integer  Range  2 to 11   RST  2  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Number of Path Points   N  on page 40                                                   
195. m of modulation  depths  SDM  see     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  GS GSLope    SDM      page 144      Parameters    lt Coupling gt  FIXed   SDM     RST  FIXed  Manual operation  See  DDM   SDM Coupling  on page 53      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM CURRent   Current      Sets the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating instru   ment  The instrument current is calculated according to     DDM uA   DDM x 857 1 uA    A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM  value and the DDM value in dB     Parameters      Current   float  Range   8 57125E 4 to 8 57125E 4  Increment  1E 7   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Current       page 52      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM DIRection   Direction     Sets the simulation mode for the ILS GS modulation signal  A change of the setting  automatically changes the sign of the DDM value     Parameters     Direction   UP   DOWN    UP  The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is  negative  the airplane is too low  it must climb      DOWN  The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is  positive  the airplane is too high  it must descend       RST  UP    Manual operation  See  Fly  on page 52    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS  GS GSLope  DDM LOGarithmic  lt Logarithmic gt   Sets the depth of modulation value for the ILS GS in dB     See also     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  GS   GSLope    DDM  DEPTh on          
196. mote command   tbd    DDM Current  Sets the current of the ILS indicating instrument corresponding to the DDM value  The  instrument current is calculated according to     DDM uA   DDM x 967 75 uA    System Configuration Settings Localizer    A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM  value and the DDM value      dB     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer DDM CURRent on          148       DDM Depth  Sets the difference in depth of modulation  DDM  between the signal of the left lobe   90 Hz  and the right lobe  150 Hz  of the ILS LOC modulation signal     The DDM value in percent is calculated as follows    e  DDM Polarity  gt  90 Hz   150 Hz   default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz    AM  150 Hz      100    e  DDM Polarity  gt  150 Hz   90 Hz    DDM     AM 150 Hz    AM  90 Hz      100     A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB  and the value of the instrument current     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer        DEPTh on page 149       DDM Logarithmic  Sets the DDM value in dB  The dB value is calculated according to     DDM dB   20 x LOG   SDM DDMx100      SDM DDMx100       A variation of the value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the  instrument current     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer DDM LOGarithmic               148                           Sets the difference      depth of modulation between th
197. mple   RST  0 samples    Manual operation  See  Trigger Delay       page 89      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger OBASeband INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OBASeband INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger 0BASeband INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger 0BASeband INHibit  lt Inhibit gt     Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger  event  This command applies only for triggering by the second path     Parameters     lt Inhibit gt  integer  Range  0 to 67108863   RST  0    Manual operation  See  Trigger Inhibit  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger RMODe     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger RMODe     SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger RMODe     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger RMODe     Queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes modulation on     Return values      lt RunMode gt  STOP   RUN   RST  STOP  Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Running Stopped  on page 86      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger SLENgth  lt SeqLength gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger SLENgth  lt Slength gt     Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 184    Trigger Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS TRIGger SLENgth  lt SeqLength gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger SLENgth  lt SeqLength gt    The command defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the  Single   trigger mode  SOUR                        SING  where xx
198. mple  Generating a GBAS signal for message format detection    The following is an example on how to generate a VDB signal with real application data  and enabled GBAS Message Type 2 and Message Type 1      RST  SOURcel FREQuency CW 110MHz    SOURce1 BB GBAS MFCHannels OFF  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 DATA RGData  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig MT2State       SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig GSRReceivers           SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig GSADesignator           SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig GCID FC  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig LMVariation 58                GBAS Settings    500      1                 500      1                 500      1                 500      1                   DB1 MCONfig SVIGradient 0   DB1 MCONfig RFINdex 379   DB1 MCONfig SHEight 100   DB1 MCONfig RUNCertainty 20  SOURCe1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig LOCation COORdinates DECimal 11 5833  48 150  110  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig  LOCation COORdinates  DMS       Response  11 34 59 88 EAST 48 9 0 NORT 110              lt   lt   lt     SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig DG STATe ON  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig  DG               1         CATalog      Response  Correctionl  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 MCONfig DG PREDefined  FILE  Correctionl   SOURce1 BB GBAS  VDB1 MCONfig  DG  FILE                       Response   Correctionl rs gbas     SOURCe1 BB GBAS  VDB1 SSID      Response  A  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 GID      REsponse  TRO  SOURcel1  BB GBAS VDB1 NOFRames      Response  20  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB1 FNUMber                    Response 
199. n   Pattern     Selects the bit pattern for the data source        Parameters    lt Pattern gt  integer  Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB2 DATA PATTern             SOURce1 BB GBAS VDB2 DATA PATTern  HB8A 12             Manual operation  See  Data Data Config  on page 28            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS NOFRames   Queries the number of VD frames     Return values      lt NOFrame gt  integer  Range  1 to 12500   RST  1   Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See        of Frames                29    10 2 4 Scheduling Settings                        SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  SCH TS lt st gt  STATe  lt State gt   Enables the VDB in the corresponding time slot  TS      Parameters     lt State gt  0 1                RST  0   Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for sensitivity tests   on page 110    Manual operation  See    50    57       page 30            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  SCH TS lt st gt  POWer   Power     Sets the relative power of a VDB per time slot  TS      Parameters    lt Power gt  float  Range   21 to 0  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for sensitivity tests   on page 110    10 2 5    GBAS Settings    Manual operation  See  Pow dB   on page 30    Message Configuration         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig AID   Ald    Sets the airport ID        Parameters    lt Ald gt  string  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    M
200. nal       Changing a parameter in the ILS standard will cause an instant signal change in the  R amp S SMBV without a measurement cylcle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband  signal in order to set the correct RF level  If the standard is switched ON for the first  time  or after every subsequent ON OFF sequence  the measurement cycle will take  place to determine the correct RF level  Every subsequent parameter change in the  ILS standard will be performed without another measurement cycle in order to provide  a continous signal output     State   Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modu   lation modes in the same path    Remote command     lt subsystem gt  STATe      page 108    Set To Default  Calls the default settings  The values of the main parameters are listed in chapter A 3    Default Settings   on page 199     Remote command    lt subsystem gt   PRESet on page 108    General Settings    Save Recall   Accesses the  Save Recall  dialog  i e  the standard instrument function for storing and  recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file  The provided navigation possibil   ities in the dialog are self explanatory     The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable  the file extension is   however predefined    Remote command     lt subsystem gt  SETTing CATalog on page 108     subsystem   SETTing STORe on page 109     subsystem   SETTing STORe  FAST on page 109     subsystem    SETTing LO
201. nd  to add new VDB transmitter            Transmitters Configuration Settings    State  Enables the selected VHF Data Broadcast  VDB  transmitter     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB  ch     STATe on          117       GBAS ID   Sets the GBAS ID  that is a four character  24 bit  alphanumeric field that identifies the  ground station broadcasting the message  Permitted are capital letter  numbers and   space     To identify a ground station  the airbone receive examine the combination of the GBAS  ID and the SSID     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  VDB  ch            on page 117    SSID  Sets the Station Slot Identifier SSID of the of the ground station     According to RTCA DO 246D  the SSID is a numeric value from 0 to 7  corresponding  to the letter designation  A through H  of the first time slot assigned to a particular  ground reference station  where slot A   0 and slot      7  All messages in all time slots  employed by a particular ground station use the same SSID     To identify a ground station  the airbone receive examine the combination of the   GBAS ID  on page 28 and the SSID     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     SSID on page 117       Freq  Num  Sets the frequency number and defines the frequency band the corresponding VDB is  using  see  Carrier frequencies and frequency channels  on page 15     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt   FNUMber      page 118       Data Data Config  Se
202. nen nennen     SOURceshws  E BB ES EOCalizer                         rrt rd                  SOURceshw   BB IES EOCalizer DDM DIRection                                           rennen     5           lt      gt       11 5 1                                                                                            148     SOURce lt hw   BBiILS  LOCalizer DDMiP CT eunte ttt                   Ee d 149    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM POWality                                          149    SOURceshws  BB IES EOCalizer  FREQUENCY                   oer nee 150    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer FREQuency MODE                     esses ra nnns 150    SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  ICAO CHANnel    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer _LLOBe  F REQuency    50         lt      gt                                                              SOURCe  shw   E         5                                                          SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer  RLOBe  FREQuency                        essent enne 151     SOURce lt hw gt   BBiILS                                                  eet tte cete cet etae ea d pt 152   5                                                                   aoi c Ere het eir ien to FO e a Pr 152    SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid DASH     SOURce lt hw gt   BBiILS MBEacon COMId DEP TR    teu ntt a         SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMId                           EX         SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS MBEacon COMid FREQuency    SOURce lt hw gt
203. nstrument current is calculated according to     DDM uA   DDM    857 125 uA    A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM  value and the DDM value in          Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope   DDM  CURRent      page 140       DDM Depth  Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the upper lobe  90Hz  and the  lower lobe  150  2  tone of the ILS GS modulation signal     The DDM value is calculated with the formula         DDM Polarity  gt  90 Hz   150 Hz   default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz          150 Hz      100    e  DDM Polarity  gt  150 Hz   90 Hz    DDM     AM 150 Hz    AM  90 Hz      100     5 3    System Configuration Settings Localizer    A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the value of the  instrument current and the DDM value      dB     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS  GS GSLope            DEPTh on page 142       DDM Logarithmic  Sets the DDM value in dB  The dB value is calculated according to     DDM        20 x LOG    SDM DDMx 10096     SDM DDMx100       A variation of the value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the  instrument current     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  ILS  GS GSLope   DDM  LOGarithmic on page 141       DDM Percent  Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the upper lobe  90Hz  and the  lower lobe  150Hz  tone of the ILS GS modulation signal     The DDM value in percent is calculate
204. nter frequency MHz     108 925 108 950 108 975 109 000 109 025 109 050 109 075 109 100 109 125 109 150 109 175       8  Select          gt  State  gt  On   9  Select        gt  State  gt                  R amp S SMBV generates    GBAS signal  composed of seven adjicent frequency  channels     The generated GBAS signal is suitable for unwanted emissions measurements  adja   cent and co channels rejections masurements and carrier frequency stability measure   ments     Generating a GBAS Signal for Receiver Sensitivity  Tests   Sensitivity tests are very essential for the performance of VDB receivers and used to  measure their ability to demodulate GBAS signal at low power level  To perform a sen   sitivity test it is suffisient to generate a single frequency signal  We use the advantages  of the gated power mode and vary the level of the generated GBAS signal  The goal of  the test is to find out the signal with the minimum level that the DUT requires to cor   rectly detect the GBAS signal    To generate a GBAS signal for sensitivity tests   1  Press PRESET to set the R amp S SMBV to a definite state    2  Select  Staus Bar  gt  Frequency   108 4 MHz    3  Select  Staus Bar  gt  Level    10 dBm     4  Select  Baseband  gt  Avionics  gt  GBAS     Generating a GBAS Signal for VDB Slot Detection    5  Select  Gated Power Mode    On     6  Select  VDB Transmitter Configuration   use the default configuration and select   VDB 1  gt  Schedulling  gt  Config      7       the  GBAS Sch
205. o a run time of 12 359 us     The range distance and the external trigger delay are dependent according to    Range Distance      Trigger Delay      X Y mode delay  12 359 us nm  where  X mode delay   50 us  Y mode delay   56 us   Changing one value automatically changes the other value     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DHE  RDIStance on page 168    SOURce  hw      BB           RDIStance UNIT on          169                Pulse Squitter  Enables disables squitter pulses     System Configuration Settings    Squitter pulses are random pulse pairs sent by a ground station if the average transmit  pulse rate drops to values between 700 pulse pairs per second  pp s   The squitter pul   ses ensure that a minimum pulse rate is provided which is cruical for the proper moni   toring and adjustment of important pulse paramaters of the ground station     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME SQUitter      page 170             Pulse Repetition Rate  Sets the number of DME pulse pairs per second     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  RATE on          168             Reply Efficiency   Available only for  DME Mode  gt  Reply     Sets the relation between reply pulse pairs and received trigger signals  e g  with a set  efficiency of 50  only every second trigger event leads to the generation of a reply  pulse pair    Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis EFFiciency                173                Pulse Input  Opens a dialog for configurati
206. oach and monitors the  correct approach path to the runway     ILS Glide Slope  90 Hz                ILS Localizer  ou jJ   o    yr 150 Hz          Ideal  ILS Glide Slope  150 Hz    Landing  Approach  Fig  3 4  Approach navigation using instrument landing system  ILS   1MA193     An ILS system consists of three independent subsystems        A glide slope for vertical guidance      A localizer for horizontal guidance        optional  marker beacons    Glide Slope    The glide slope transmitter is located near the end of the runway  nearest to the start of  the aircraft approach      Typically  vertically aligned antennas transmit two intersecting main beams on top of  one another at carrier frequencies between 329 MHz and 335 MHz  The top beam is  usually modulated at 90 Hz and the beam below at 150 Hz  1MA193      The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by eval   uating the difference in depth of modulation  DDM   The following scenarios are possi   ble       Predominance of the 90 Hz beam  the aircraft is too high and must descend   e Predominance of the 150 Hz beam  the aircraft is too low and needs to climb      The singal strength from both beams is equal  the aircraft is in the center  on the  right course     The Instrument Landing System  ILS     If there is a predominance of the 90 Hz beam  then the aircraft is too high and must  descend  A predominant 150 Hz means that the aircraft is too low and needs to climb        Localizer 
207. ock  marker and trigger settings   on page 113    Manual operation  See  Marker Mode  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  PATTern   Pattern     Defines the bit pattern used to generate the marker signal PATTern                       Parameters     lt Pattern gt  integer   Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut1 MODE PATTern  SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut1  PATTern   H5670 15    Manual operation  See  Marker Mode  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  PULSe DIVider  lt Divider gt     Sets the divider for Pulse marker mode  PULSe                                       Parameters     lt Divider gt  integer  Range  2 to 1024   RST  2   Example  SOURce1 BB GBAS MSET  SRATe   Response  10500  SOURce1 BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut2 MODE PULSe  SOURCe1 BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut2 PULSe DIVider 4  SOURCe1 BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut2 PULSe   FREQuency        Response  2625  2625   10500 4    Manual operation  See  Marker Mode  on page 90         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  PULSe FREQuency   Queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal PULSe     Return values    lt Frequency gt  float    Range  2 to 1024  Increment  1E 3   RST  2    Usage  Query only    Marker Settings GBAS  Manual operation  See  Marker Mode  on page 90      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  ONTime  lt OnTime gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt  OFFTime  lt              gt     Sets the number of symbo
208. of this description     Generating GBAS Signals with Several Frequency  Channels    With the R amp S SMBV  you can generate simulataneously multiple frequency GBAS sig   nal  Multiple frequency signals are suitable for testing the capability of VDB receivers of  tuning frequencies in the frequency range  as specified in RTCA DO 246D     This example shows how to use the multiple frequency function to generate a GBAS  signal  containing GBAS Frequency Channels 39 to 45   To enable the generation of several frequency channels    1  Calculate the channel number of the central frequency    39   45  2   42    2  For frequency channel number 42  calculate the channel frequency   Channel frequency   108 025 MHz   42 25 kHz   109 075 MHz    3  Select  Status Bar  gt  Frequency   109 075 MHz  to set the center frequency     4  Select  Baseband  gt  Avionics  gt  GBAS  and select  Multiple Frequency Channels  gt   On    5  Select  VDB Transmitters Configuration     The graph confirms the selected center frequency   The R amp S SMBV selects the 10 adjacent frequency channels  symmetrically located  around the central one  The central frequency is referred as frequency number 0     6  Use the  Append  function to enable seven VDBs  VDB 1 to VBD 7     7  Inthe VDB table  for each VDB  select different                   to allocated them to  different frequency channels     Generating    GBAS Signal for Receiver Sensitivity Tests    9 2         GBAS  VDB Transmitters Configuration       Ce
209. on of the pulse input settings        DME Pulse Input      x     Input Source Ext Triggered     Reply Delay   50 00  us          Input Source     Pulse Input   Selects the input of the DME pulses  In case  DME Mode  gt Interrogation  the setting  selects the input for the reply pulses of a ground station  while for  DME Mode    Reply   the input of the interogation pulses of an airplane is choosen      Ext Triggered   The pulses are received via the backward TRIG connector  Please  make sure that only the demodulated pulse envelope is input at this  connector  If a modulated RF signal is applied  use the  Ext Power  Sensor  mode      Ext Power Sensor   The R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor as an input for modulated RF pul   ses  An external DME signal is fed into a sensor  The 50  voltage  point of this signal is used by the R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor sensor  to generate the trigger for the R amp S SMBV     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  PINPut   SOURce on page 170             7 2 2    System Configuration Settings    Reply Delay     Pulse Input  Sets the delay between the external trigger and the first DME output pulse  50  volt   age point of first pulse      For DME Reply mode this simulates the defined delay of the DME transponder and  twice the run time of the signal  from interrogator to transponder and back   The delay  is a measure of the range distance  thus  the two values are interdependent according  to     Delay   X Y mode delay   range distance   1
210. page 189           Pattern  Marker signal that is defined by a 64 bit long pattern     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt   PATTern on page 189     ON OFF Regular marker signal defined by an ON OFF ratio    Ratio  A marker period lasts one ON and OFF cycle   The  ON Time  and  OFF Time  are each expressed as a number of  samples     ON time OFF time ON time OFF time    Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger  OUTPut lt ch gt  ONTime      page 190    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut  ch     OFFTime               190        Trigger  A received internal or external trigger signal is output at the marker  connector     Remote command     SOURce  hw     BB GBAS TRIGger OUTPut  ch   MODE on page 188    Marker x Delay  Defines the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs relative to the sig   nal generation start      Marker x  For the corresponding marker  sets the delay as a number of sam   ples     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut  ch     DELay on          190        Current Range without Recalculation   Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker sig   nals can be set without restarting the marker and the signal   Move the setting mark to define the delay     Remote command           SOURce lt hw gt    BB  GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut  ch   DELay MINimum   on page 190    SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS  TRIGger OUTPut  ch   DELay MAXimum   on page 190    Avionics Stan
211. page 55      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer  MODE   Mode      Sets the operating mode for the ILS LOC modulation signal     Parameters      Mode   NORM   LLOBe   RLOBe  NORM  ILS LOC modulation is active   LLOBe    Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the left lobe   90Hz  signal component of the ILS LOC signal is active   RLOBe   Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the right lobe   150Hz  signal component of the ILS LOC signal is active      RST  NORM    Manual operation  See  Mode  on page 55      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS LOCalizer PHASe   Phase      Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and right antenna lobe of the  ILS GS signal  The zero crossing of the right lobe  150Hz  signal serves as a refer   ence  The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe     Parameters      Phase   float  Range   60 to 120  Increment  0 01   RST  0    Manual operation  See  Left Right Phase                55      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer RLOBe  FREQuency    Frequency      Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the right viewed from  the air plane     Parameters    lt Frequency gt  float    Range  100 to 200  Increment  0 05   RST  150    Manual operation  See  Right Frequency  on page 55    10 3 4    ILS Settings                              SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer SDM  lt Sdm gt     Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the left lobe  90  2  and right lobe   150  
212. ping  settings     8 1 Trigger Settings  To access this dialog  select  GBAS  gt                                  ILS  gt  Trigger      VOR  gt  Trig                     gt Trigger Marker         This dialog provides access to the settings necessary to select and configure the trig   ger      Sequence Length  SL        1  SL        External         Sync  Output To Ext  Trigger            50 00  Samples       o  Samples            Trigger Mode  Selects trigger mode  i e  determines the effect of a trigger event on the signal genera   tion   e  Auto   The signal is generated continuously   e  Retrigger   The signal is generated continuously  A trigger event  internal or external  causes a  restart        Armed Auto     Trigger Settings    The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs  Then the signal is gener   ated continuously         Arm  stops the signal generation  A subsequent trigger event  internal with or  external  causes a restart        Armed Retrigger   The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs  Then the signal is gener   ated continuously  Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart   An  Arm  stops signal generation  A subsequent trigger event  internal with or  external  causes a restart    e  Single   The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs  Then the signal is gener   ated once to the length specified at  Signal Duration    Every subsequent trigger event  internal or external  causes a restart     Remote command   
213. ple Frequency Channels    Off     Provided are the following settings for configuring the baseband filter     Filter  Selects the baseband filter     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  FILTer                page 136          Roll Off Factor or         Sets the filter parameter     The filter parameter offered   Roll Off Factor  or           depends on the currently  selected filter type  This parameter is preset to the default for each of the predefined  filters    The Roll Off Factor affects the steepness of the filter flanks  A  Roll Off Factor    0  results in the steepest flanks  values near to 1 make the flanks more flat     Filter Clipping Settings    Roll Off Factor   0 22    g Roll Off Factor   0         Roll Off Factor   1       f  Hz    Fig  4 2  Example of the frequency response of a filter with different Roll Off Factors    Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       BB GBAS FILTer PARameter APCO25      page 136  BI     SOURce lt hw gt   B             B   B GBAS FILTer PARameter COSine on page 136  B GBAS FILTer PARameter GAUSs on page 136  B  B  B         SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt       SOURce lt hw gt        GBAS  FILTer  PARameter  PGAuss on          136   GBAS FILTer PARameter RCOSine      page 137   GBAS  FILTer  PARameter  SPHase on page 137                                          Cut Off Frequency Factor  Sets the value for the cut off frequency factor  The cut off frequency of the filter can be  adjusted to rea
214. port facilities  Permitted are upper letters  numbers and  space      Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig AID on page 120    Runway Number     FAS Data Set  Sets the approach runway number     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  RNUMber on page 132       Runway Letter     FAS Data Set  Sets the runway letter  to distinguish between parallel runways  The conventional des   ignation is used     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  RLETter on page 131    Approach Performance Designator     FAS Data Set  Sets the general information about the approach design  The conventional designation  is used     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig APDesignator on          120       Route Indicator     FAS Data Set   Sets the route indicator  that is a single alphabetic character used to differentiate  between multiple approaches to the same runway end  Allowed are the upper case let   ters  excluding  I  and           or the    space    character     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt                      VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  RUINdicator on          133       Reference Path Data Selector     FAS Data Set  Sets the reference path data selector  RPDS   that is a numerical identifier that is  unique on a frequency in the broadcast region and used to select the FAS     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  RPDF on page 1
215. predefined or user defined way   point files    A waypoint file is description of a moving scenario  like for example a sequence of  positions  A waypoint file must have the extension     txt and file format as described  in chapter A 4 1   Waypoint File Format   on page 202     Message Configuration Settings    Use the  Predefined Files  fuction  to load a predefined file     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint  PREDefined   CATalog  on page 135     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint USER CATalog   on page 135     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint  PREDefined  FILE  on page 135     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint USER  FILE  on page 135     SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint  FILE  on page 136                                              Predefined Files            Data Set  Access a list with predefined files     FAS RPDS or Continuation Link     TAP Data Set   Sets the FAS reference path data selector  RPDS  or the continuation link  Continua   tion link is the RPDS for the next segment that is a continuation of the previous seg   ment     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCON  ig  FRCLink on page 125    TAP Vertical Alert Limit   Status        TAP Data Set  Sets the value of the broadcast vertical alert limit     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB  ch     MCONf ig  TVAS on page 
216. pted every 40 seconds  ID period  and  one ID sequence is transmitted instead  The  key down time  of the ground signal cor   responds to the period of transmission for a dot or dash in the Morse code ID  sequence  e g  100ms for a dot   During the key down times reply pulses are not trans   mitted  however  they are transmitted between the key down times     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ID  STATe       page 181          Show Hide Details  Reveals the detailed setting options for the COM ID signal     Once the details are revealed  the labeling on the button changes to  Hide Details    Use this to hide the detailed setting options display again     Pair of Pulse Pairs  Enables the transmission of a pair of pulse pairs during the set  Rate      The ID signal consists of a regular group of pulses that generates Morse code dots and  dashes  To form the regular pulse groups  two pulse pairs are separated by 100 us   This is called a pair of pairs  These pair combinations are transmitted at a regular rate  of 1350 pairs of pairs  see figure 7 1  This results in a repetition rate of 1350 Hz  which  is an audible tone for an ident     a 740 8       Fig  7 1  Signal with enabled pair of puse pairs    System Configuration Settings    If the  Pair of Pulse Pairs  is disabled only a single pulse pair is transmitted in the  selected  Rate   see figure 7 2     740 8       Fig  7 2  Signal with disabled pair of puse pairs    Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB DME  ID  PPP
217. quency  Refer to  chapter A 2 2   VOR Channel Frequencies    on page 195 for an overview of the  standard defined VOR transmitting frequencies     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  ICAO              1               158       6 2 2    System Configuration Settings    Mode   Selects the operating mode for the VOR modulation signal     Norm  VOR modulation is active     Var  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the VAR signal com     ponent  30Hz signal content  of the VOR signal  The modulation  depth corresponds to the value set under  VAR Depth       Subcarrier  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated FM  carrier  9960Hz  of the VOR signal  The modulation depth corre   sponds to the value set under  Subcarrier Depth       Subcarrier   Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the frequency modula    FM  ted FM carrier  9960Hz  of the VOR signal  The frequency deviation  corresponds to the value set under  REF Deviation   the modulation  depth corresponds to the value set under  Subcarrier Depth      Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  MODE on          156    VAR REF Frequency  Sets the frequency of the VAR signal and the REF signal  As the two signals must  have the same frequency  the setting is valid for both signals     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  VAR  FREQuency on page 160          VAR Depth  Sets the AM modulation depth of the 30Hz VAR signal     Note  The sum of  Subcarrier depth   
218. rbone subsystem       User definable transmission band and support of single and multiple frequency  transmission  up to 11 frequency channels simultaneously   for example for adja   cent channel emissions measurements      Configuration of GBAS application data  for example the parameters of message  type 2 and 4  incl  the Final Approach Segment  FAS  data definition and Terminal  Area Path  TAP  data       Import of differential Global Navigation Satellite System  GNSS  data  message  type 1 and 11       Encoding  timing and power settings according to the specification RTCA  DO 246D     Realtime signal changes for the flight navigation standards ILS  VOR and DME    Changing a parameter in the standards will cause an instant signal change in the   R amp S SMBV without a measurement cylcle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband  signal in order to set the correct RF level  If the standards are switched ON for the first  time  or after every subsequent ON OFF sequence  the measurement cycle will take  place to determine the correct RF level  Every subsequent parameter change in the  standards will be performed without another measurement cycle in order to provide a  continous signal output     The ILS Option    The R amp S SMBV K151 is a firmware application that adds functionality to generate sig   nals in accordance with the the ground based instrument landing system  ILS   It pro   vides lateral and vertical guidance to an aircraft approaching and landing on a runway 
219. rence receivers     Parameters    lt Gsrr gt  GW3R   GW4R   GW2R   RST  GW2R  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Ground Station Reference Receivers  on page 32      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates   DECimal  lt Longitude gt    lt Latitude gt     Defines the coordinates of the LTP FTP in decimal format     Parameters     lt Longitude gt  float  Range   180 to 180  Increment  1E 6   RST  0    GBAS Settings     lt Latitude gt  float  Range   90 to 90  Increment  1E 6   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  LTP FTP Location Configuration  on page 37                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig LFLocation COORdinates DMS   lt LongitudeDeg gt    lt LongitudeMin gt    lt LongitudeSec gt    lt LongitudeDir gt     lt LatitudeDeg gt    lt LatitudeMin gt    lt LatitudeSec gt    lt LatitudeDir gt     Defines the coordinates of the LTP FTP in degrees  minutes and seconds     Parameters    lt LongitudeDeg gt  integer  Range  0 to 180   RST  0   lt LongitudeMin gt  integer  Defines the longitude minutes   Range  0 to 59   RST  0   lt LongitudeSec gt  float  Defines the longitude seconds   Range  0 to 59 999  Increment  0 001   RST  0   lt LongitudeDir gt  EAST   WEST  Defines the longitude direction    RST  EAST   lt LatitudeDeg gt  integer  Defines the latitude degre
220. repair  troubleshooting and fault elimina   tion  It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement  of modules     This manual can also be orderd in printed form  see ordering information in the data  sheet    Release Notes    The release notes describe new and modified functions  eliminated problems  and last  minute changes to the documentation  The corresponding firmware version is indicated  on the title page of the release notes  The current release notes are provided in the  Internet     Web Help    The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the  R amp S SMBV and all available options  without downloading  The content of the web  help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version     Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 8    Typographical Conventions    The web help is available on the R amp S SMBV product page at the Downloads  gt  Web  Help area   Application Notes    Application notes  application cards  white papers and educational notes are further  publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa   tion     The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde  amp  Schwarz website  at  http   www rohde schwarz com appnotes     1 3 Typographical Conventions    The following text markers are used throughout this documentation           Convention Description   Graphical user interface ele  All names of graphical user interface elements on t
221. req  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq  Freq   19X 108 20 1043 980    61X 1085 1022    103X 115 60 1127 1190  19Y 108 25 1043 1106    61Y 1085 1148    1037 115 65 1127 1064  20   108 30 1044 981    62   1086 1023    104   115 70 1128 1191  20   108 35 1044 1107    62   1086 1149    104   115 75 1128 1065  21   108 40 1045 982    63   1087 1024    105   115 80 1129 1192  217 108 45 1045 1108    6     1087 1150    1057 115 85 1129 1066  22   108 50 1046 983    64   1088 1151    106   115 90 1130 1193  22   108 55 1046 1109    64   1088 1025    106   115 95 1130 1067  23   108 60 1047 984    65   1089 1152    107   116 00 1131 1194  23   108 65 1047 1110    65Y 1089 1026    1077 116 05 1131 1068  24   108 70 1048 985    66   1090 1153    108   116 10 1132 1195  24   108 75 1048 1111    66Y 1090 1027    108Y 116 15 1132 1069  25X 108 80 1049 986    67X 1091 1154    109X 116 20 1133 1196  25Y 108 85 1049 1112    67Y 1091 1028    109Y 116 25 1133 1070  26X 108 90 1050 987    68X 1092 1155    110X 116 30 1134 1197  26Y 108 95 1050 1113    68Y 1092 1029    110Y 116 35 1134 1071  27   109 00 1051 988    69   1093 1156    111   116 40 1135 1198  277 109 05 1051 1114    69   1093 1030    111   116 45 1135 1072  28   109 10 1052 989    70X 112 30 1094 1157    112   116 50 1136 1199  287 109 15 1052 1115    70   112 35 1094 1031    1127 116 55 1136 1073  29   109 20 1053 990    71   112 40 1095 1158    113   116 60 1137 1200  29   109 25 1053 1116    71   112 45 1095 1032    113   116 65 1137 1074  
222. rity  the trigger  threshold and the input impedance of the trigger signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw     BB GBAS  TRIGger  SOURce on page 185    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  TRIGger   SOURce on page 185    SOURce  hw      BB  VOR  TRIGger  SOURce on page 185    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  TRIGger  SOURce on page 185             Sync  Output to External Trigger   enabled for Trigger Source External     Enables disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event          R amp S SMBV instruments     For two or more R amp S SMBVs configured to work in a master slave mode for synchro   nous signal generation  configure this parameter depending on the provided system  trigger event and the properties of the output signal  See below for an overview of the  required settings                        Trigger Settings    pical Applications   All instruments are synchronous to the external trigger event       System Trigger   common External Trigger event        the master and the slave  instruments        Sync  Output to External Trigger    ON   All instruments are synchronous among themselves but starting the signal from first   symbol is more important than synchronicity with external trigger event       System Trigger   common External Trigger event for the master and the slave  instruments        Sync  Output to External Trigger    OFF   All instruments are synchronous among themselves       System Trigger   internal trigger signal of the master R amp S 
223. s  The pulse spacing is distributed randomly in  the range of 60 us to about 1500 us according to EUROCAE EN 54 6 2 12  The squit   ter pulses are constantly sent by the ground station in order to ensure proper operation  and in order to ease synchronization of the aircraft interrogator to the ground station     Parameters    lt Squitter gt  0 1  OFF            RST  0    Manual operation  See  Pulse Squitter  on page 73      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPut SOURce  lt InputSource gt     Selects the trigger mode for DME modulation signals     DME Settings    Parameters     lt InputSource gt  EXTernal   PSENsor  EXTernal  The signals are triggered by an external trigger event  The trig   ger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector   PSENsor  The signals are triggered by an external power sensor  This  mode is only available if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  MODE  on page 164 is set to  NTerrogation      RST  EXTernal       Manual operation  See  Input Source  on page 74      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME PINPut DELay   Delay      Sets the delay between the external trigger and the first DME output pulse  50  volt   age point of first pulse   Available only if     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  PINPut  SOURce  is set to EXTernal              For DME Reply mode this simulates the defined delay of the DME transponder and  twice the run time of the signal  from interrogator to transponder and back   The delay  is a measure of the range distance  thus  the two values are interdependent
224. s  see chapter 4 3    Scheduling Settings   on page 30     Refer to figure 3 3 for illustration on how a multi frequency TDMA scheduling is per   formed in this implementation              Time slots                                        L J 2   L Jf             1             Center frequency MHz            109 325 109950 109975 110 00                                  2 ESTRENA 5   Frequency Number                                                      Fig  3 3  Example of a multi frequency TDMA scheduling           Ground Based Augmentation System  GBAS     For step by step instruction  refer to chapter 9 3   Generating a GBAS Signal for VDB  Slot Detection   on page 99     Power settings    In the R amp S SMBV  the following parameters have impact on the signal power of the  time slots   e RF output power   Status Bar  gt  Level    Defines the RMS level of the generated signal     Relative power per time slot   GABS  gt         Transmitters Configuration  gt  VDB    gt  Scheduling  gt  Pow    Sets the relative power of a VDB per time slot  TS       Power generation mode   GBAS  gt  Gated Power Mode    Defines the way the absolute power of a VDB per time slot is calculated   The absolute power of a single time slot depends on the power settings of the  remaining time slots   See example  Calculating the power per time slot in  Gated Power Mode  gt         on page 17 and example  Calculating the power per time slot in  Gated Power  Mode  gt  On   on          18 for explanation
225. s determined by the respective national ATC authority     Distance Measurement Equipment  DME     Fig  3 7  Time characteristic of DME signal envelope for X and Y channel    DME Interrogator    The aircraft s DME interrogator sends a sequence of pulses that are received at the  ground station and  after a defined delay time  are returned at a different frequency   The frequency offset between the sent and received signal is always 63 MHz  The  receiver in the aircraft filters its own pulse sequence out of all received pulses and in  this way determines the time difference between the transmitted and received pulse  It  then uses this time to calculate the slant range to the ground station  The distance is  usually indicated in nautical miles  NM   where 1 NM corresponds to 1852 02 m and a  signal round trip time of 12 359 us  As a result  by taking the flight altitude above  ground as well as the azimuth angle between the aircraft and ground station  VOR sys   tem  into consideration  it is possible to determine the precise position of the aircraft     DME Transponder    In the receiver  the validity of all received pulses  i e  the pulse spacing must be consis   tent with the channel  is checked in the  decoder   A single pulse  for example  is fil   tered out as an invalid interrogation and no reply to this pulse is sent     After a valid DME double pulse is received  i e  after the 2nd pulse is received   the  receiver at first does not react to any further interrogations 
226. s the length of the symbol space in seconds     Available only if    SOoURce lt hw gt     BR  ILS  LOCalizer COMid  TSCHema is set to  USER        Parameters    lt Symbol gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Symbol Space  on          59      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid TSCHema  lt TSchema gt   Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     In the standard time schema  STD  the set dot length determines the dash length     three times the dot length  whereas in the user time schema  USER  all length param   eters can be set independently     Parameters    lt TSchema gt  STD   USER     RST  STD    Manual operation  See  Time Schema  on page 59      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer COMid  STATe    State   Switches on  off the addittional COM ID signal     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1 OFF ON     RST  0    Manual operation  See  State  on page 58      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM COUPling   Coupling     Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation  depths  SDM  see     SOURce lt hw gt           1LS LOCalizer SDM on page 152         Parameters    lt Coupling gt  FIXed   SDM     RST  FIXed  Manual operation  See  DDM   SDM Coupling  on page 57    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM CURRent   Current      Sets the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating instru   ment  The instrument current is calculated according to     DDM 
227. se time of the pulse  10  to 90  of the peak voltage      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  RISE on page 169             Pulse Width  Sets the pulse width  5096 to 5096 of peak voltage      Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DHE  WIDTh on          172       Pulse Fall  Sets the fall time of the pulse  90  to 1096 of peak voltage      Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  FALL on page 165    Pulse Spacing  Sets the spacing between the first and second pulse of a pulse pair  the time between  the half voltage points on the leading edge of each pulse      Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  PPS on page 167             Single Pulse  Activates deactivates generation of a single test pulse     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  SINGl1e on page 170             DME Analysis  Available only for  DME Mode  gt  Interrogation      Accesses the  DME Analysis  dialog     For a description of the available settings  refer to chapter 7 2 4   DME Analysis    on page 77     Receive Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the receiving of the pulse        Pulse Pair Spacing Tolerance  Determines the pulse pair spacing tolerance     If the spacing is e g  12 us  the reply station will see a pulse pair with a spacing of 11 5  to 12 5 us as a valid interrogation pair and will respond to it  Otherwise  no reply will be  generated     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  PPS      page 167             System Conf
228. ser      Sets the length of a Morse dash in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  ID  DASH on          178    Symbol Space  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a symbol space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DHE  ID  SYMBo1 on page 180    Letter Space  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a letter space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB DME  ID  LETTer on          179                   Adjustment Factors    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to normalize the setup when triggering  the instrument with a power sensor     Normalize Setup      Power Sensor Adjustment Factor  Internal Adjustment Factor    Used Adjustment Factor  Internat m         In order to calibrate    measurement setup regarding external pulse input and internal  processing delays  the  Normalize Setup  functionality can be used     For DME operation in combination with a power sensor as input channel  the exact trig   ger point has to be known to compensate for the pulse shape and the internal delay of  the Sensor     As shown in figure 7 3  the R amp S SMBV gets interrogation pulses from an external DUT  using the same pulse shape  According to the settings  the R amp S SMBV should send a  reply pulse pair 50us after receiving the interrogation pulse pair     System Configuration Settings    In order to to guarantee  that the 50  edge levels are exactly 50us separated from  
229. sh length     three times the dot length  whereas in the user time schema  USER  all length param   eters can be set independently     Parameters    lt TSchema gt  STD   USER     RST  STD    Manual operation  See  Time Schema  on page 81               SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID  STATe    State    Switches on  off the addittional COM ID signal     Parameters    lt State gt  0 1                   RST  0  Manual operation  See  COM ID State   on page 80    Trigger Settings    EXTernal lt ch gt        The numeric suffix to EXTernal lt ch gt  distinguishes between the external trigger via  the TRIGGER 1  suffix 1  and TRIGGER 2  suffix 2  connector       5           lt      gt                                                                  00  00                             arians 182    5           lt      gt                                                              2          2 1 212   44   140066                    182    5           lt      gt        115                                                         0    0           nen eene 182                       gt                                                       cra tdeo t terere             182   SOURce  hw   FBB DME TRIGger EXEGCUte               2    m tree reed      183    5           lt      gt                                                                                                                          183   SOURce lt hw   BBILS  T RIG0e EXECU                    183   SOURce  hw  EBBIVOR TRIGger EXEQCu
230. surementtype gt  measurement type   lt                          gt  ephemeris CRC   lt dgnssvector gt     lt data gt  One  lt dgnssvector gt  per each of the N measurement blocks             GNSS _Standard gt  lt SVID gt   lt Issue of Data  IOD      Pseudor   ange Correction  PRC  in  m  gt   lt Range Rate Correction  RRC   in  m s  gt     GNSS Standard G for GPS  R for Glonass and S for SBAS       Glossary  Specifications and References    Symbols  1MA193  1    193 0   Application Note   Aeronautical radio navigation measurement  solutions     RTCA DO 246D   GNSS Based Precision Approach Local Area Augmentation System   LAAS  Signal in Space Interface Control Document  ICD      List of Commands                      lt       gt                                                                           173    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALYsis EFFICIGNCY 2                         173   50  0       lt      gt                                                          cece ee ce                                            5           lt       gt                         5                                               SOURce lt hw  gt   BB DME ANAL                TIME         SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis GATE  LENGth                    lt      gt                                                             t               177    5           lt       gt                                                                               174   500       lt      gt                           
231. t                                                         55                             136                 lt       gt                                                                                136    5           lt       gt                                                                 2               137    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS FILTer PARameter SPHase                                  aas 137     SOURces lt hw gt   BB GBAS                                                                                                         136    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS GPOW     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS MFCHannels                         SOURceshw gt   BB GBAS MSEIMI MPG  sti ccscinccscenesntssansscenses concen ceasensaenssviguticane                       con cos              138   SOURce lt hw   BB GBAS MSEU SRATC      eter rtp cen E n            138    SOURceshw  BB GBAS NOFRamiIe87           cotone rrt rere ag RR EE CER EE ERR          119   SOURceshw gt   BB GBAS RRE SC                trocken p ERES Sp           HY Hb eve ek                    EDI           SOURceshw   BB GBAS  SGMTI    rette          teret ren ipee eroe i CX ERR                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing CATalog        ESOURceshw gt   BB GBAS SE Ting                                           lt      gt                                                    th ta         SOURce lt hw   BB GBAS SET        5                                                      SOURceshw   BB GBAS SET Ting  STORG EAST      c
232. t     BB  ILS  MBEacon  FREQuency on page 155             Marker Frequency  Sets the modulation frequency of the marker signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon MARKer  FREQuency on page 155             Marker Depth  Sets the modulation depth of the marker signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon  MARKer   DEPTh on page 155                System Configuration Settings Marker Beacons    5 4 2            Settings    The dialog comprises the settings  necessary to configure the COM ID settings availa   ble for the ILS marker beacon modulation     1 020 0  kHz       State  Enables disables an additional communication identification  COM ID  signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon COMid  STATe       page 155             Show Hide Details  Reveals the detailed setting options for the COM ID signal     Once the details are revealed  the labeling on the button changes to  Hide Details    Use this to hide the detailed setting options display again     Code   Sets the coding of the COM ID signal by the international short name of the airport   e g         for the Munich airport   If      coding is entered  the COM ID tone is sent  uncoded  key down      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS MBEacon COMid  CODE      page 152          Frequency  Sets the frequency of the COM ID signal     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt           115                           1      FREQuency      page 153                            Sets 
233. t    BB DME ANALysis IAFactor       page 177       Used Adjustment Factor  Selects which internal adjustment factor should be used      Internal  The mathematically calculated value of the time  when the pulse rea   ches its 50  level  The power sensor trigger hysteresis and the small  delay from the power sensor trigger output to the R amp S SMBV are not  considered by the calculation      Power Sen  The during a normalization setup measured adjustment factor   sor     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB DME ANALysis UAFactor on          178             Trigger Settings    8 Trigger Marker Clock Settings    The  Trigger In  section is where the trigger for the signal is set  Various parameters  will be provided for the settings  depending on which trigger source   internal or exter   nal   is selected  The current status of signal generation   Running  or  Stopped   is  indicated for all trigger modes     The  Marker Mode  section is where the marker signals at the MARKER output con   nectors are configured     The  Marker Delay  section is where a marker signal delay can be defined  either with   out restriction or restricted to the dynamic section  i e   the section in which it is possi   ble to make settings without restarting signal and marker generation     The  Clock Settings  section is where the clock source is selected and   in the case of  an external source   the clock type     The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger  clock and map
234. t   BB VOR FREQuency MODE ts    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR IGAO  CHANG                                              ESOURCeshw gt   BBEV OR MODE                                                              gt  E BB VORSPRESet         rti recreo nace ied e Rt ete                      BB  VOR PRESet sein renta rr A      a          RU EXEC ex PED                        gt                                  DEVlatlon           cacao to pietate re    orna 159    SOURceshw    BB VOR SET TING CA Lalog         neon ttr trente rere 108    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing DELete      SOURceshw  gt  BBAVOR SE MING                 cecus seco oor rn                                                        SOURcCeshwsEBB VOR SETTitig   S TORO    eerta teet tet pen e tp tee de D tpe                         BB VOR SET Tirnig STORG  FAST    i reet te Eten i re Een d Ed eld 110              BB VOR STATO                                     108   SOURCeshws                          tco hee reet rt c                    157    SOURceshw   BB                                          iuc ira er see aeter                    159    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SUBCarrier   FREQuency       160    SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGgerARMIEXECUtGC                          ce dee tr pt et aces        eue eie 182    SOURce lt hw gt   BB  VOR TRIGgerEXEGCUIe            re rrr ect aiden        183    SOURce  hw   BB VOR TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut                  essen 183    SOURce  hw    BB VOR TRIGger OBASeband
235. t Count gt  integer    Range  1 to 10000  Increment  1   RST  100    Manual operation  See  Measurement Time       page 78      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis GATE EDELay  lt Edelay gt     Sets the expected reply delay  The expected reply delay and the gate length determine  the measurement window  expected reply delay     gate length 2      DME Settings    Parameters     lt Edelay gt  float  Range  0 to 150E 6  Increment  1E 7   RST  50E 6    Manual operation  See  Expected Reply Delay  on page 78      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ANALysis GATE  LENGth    Length    Sets the gate length for the measurement window     The measurement gate settings determine the measurement window  expected reply  delay     gate length 2   Only reply pulses for which the 50  voltage point of the rising  edge of the first pulse is within the measurement window are used to evaluate the  delay time and reply efficiency  The delay measurement is averaged within the mea   surement cycle  The reply efficiency is calculated once for each measurement cycle     The gate length is 1 us and the expected reply delay is 50 us  The measurement win   dow lies in the range between 49 5 and 50 5 us  Only pulse pairs are used for the mea   surement whose 50  voltage point of the rising edge of the first pulse is within this    range   Gate length 2  Expected reply delay   50us   0546  m gt    gt     oU 49 508 505     Measurement window   1us   Parameters    lt Length gt  integer    Range  100E 9 to 326E 6  Increm
236. t signal with the left lobe  90  2     signal component of the ILS LOC signal   The modulation depth of the 90Hz signal results from the settings of  parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to       Fly  gt  Right   AM 90 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM    100        Fly  gt  Left   AM 90 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100       150 Hz  Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the right lobe  150Hz   signal component of the ILS LOC signal   The modulation depth of the 150Hz signal results from the settings of  parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to      parameter  Fly     Right   AM  150 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100       parameter  Fly     Left   AM  150 Hz    0 5 x  SDM   DDM x 100      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer MODE on          151          Left Frequency  Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the left viewed from the  air plane     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer LLOBe  FREQuency       page 150    Right Frequency  Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the right viewed from  the air plane     Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS LOCalizer RLOBe  FREQuency       page 151       Left Right Phase   Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and right antenna lobe  The  zero crossing of the right         150Hz  signal serves as a reference  The angle refers  to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe     Remote command     SOURce  hw
237. t subsystem gt  SETTing LOAD    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing LOAD   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing LOAD   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing LOAD   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing LOAD   Filename      Loads the selected file from the default or the sepcified directory  Load are files with  extension     dme    gbas   ils   vor     Refer to section  MMEM Subsystem  in the R amp S SMBV manual for general information  on file handling in the default and a specific directories     Setting parameters     Filename   string    Usage  Setting only     lt subsystem gt  SETTing STORe    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing STORe   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing STORe   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing STORe   Filename      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SETTing STORe   Filename      Stores the current settings into the selected file  the file extensions     dme     gbas     ils   vor is assined automatically     Refer to section           Subsystem  in the R amp S SMBV operating manual for general  information on file handling in the default and a specific directories     Setting parameters     Filename   string    Usage  Setting only     lt subsystem gt  SETTing STORe FAST    SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME SETTing STORe FAST  lt FastSave gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS SETTing STORe FAST   Fast      Operating Manual 1176 8600 02     05 109    10 2    10 2 1    GBAS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS SETTing STORe FAST
238. t vertical alert limit     Parameters    lt Fvaa gt  float  Range  0 to 25 4  Increment  0 1   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Manual operation  See  FAS Vertical Alert Limit   Approach Status  on page 39                                          SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GCID  lt Gcid gt     Sets the ground station continuity integrity designator     Parameters    lt Gcid gt  FC   FD   RST  FC  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Ground Station Continuity Integrity Designator  on          32    GBAS Settings         SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GPANgle  lt Gpa gt   Sets the glide path angle     Parameters    lt Gpa gt  float  Range  0 to 90  Increment  0 01   RST  0  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Plan View Profile View Parameters  on page 36      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GSADesignator  lt Gsad gt     Sets the ground station accuracy designator     Parameters    lt Gsad gt  GADA   GADB   GADC   RST  GADA  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal for message format    detection  on page 111    Manual operation  See  Ground Station Accuracy Designator  on page 32      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig GSRReceivers  lt Gsrr gt     Sets the number of ground station refe
239. tandards and digital modu   lation modes in the same path    Remote command     lt subsystem gt  STATe      page 108    Set To Default   Calls the default settings  The values of the main parameters are listed in chapter A 3    Default Settings   on page 199    Remote command     lt subsystem gt   PRESet on page 108    General Settings    Save Recall   Accesses the  Save Recall  dialog  i e  the standard instrument function for storing and  recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file  The provided navigation possibil   ities in the dialog are self explanatory     The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable  the file extension is  however predefined     Remote command    lt subsystem gt  SETTing CATalog on page 108  SETTing STORe on page 109  SETTing STORe  FAST               109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing  LOAD on page 109   lt subsystem gt  SETTing  DELete      page 108     lt subsystem gt     lt subsystem gt            Data List Management  Accesses the  Data List Management  dialog  In this dialog you can create and edit a  data list     The instrument stores all data lists as files with the predefined file extension    dm iqd  You can define the file name and the directory they are stored in     To use an existing data list as a data source   e select  VDB Transmitters Configuration  gt  VDB   gt  Data Source  gt  Data List  and     select  Data Config  gt  Select Data List  gt  navigate to the list file   dm_iqd  gt  Select      Genera
240. te                     inedia niaii 134                lt       gt                        lt      gt                                          134     lt            lt      gt              5        lt      gt                    8        0      044   20101      EEEn 134   500       lt      gt                         lt      gt                                                   136     5           lt      gt                        lt      gt                                                                                                    135    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig WAYPoint  PREDefined FILE                           esses 135     5           lt      gt                        lt      gt                                                                                                     135    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAY Point  USER FILE  5           lt      gt        6    5       lt      gt  5     15 lt                               50         lt      gt                       lt      gt  6       5 lt      gt  5                                00              SOURceshw   E BB GBAS VDBSChP SSID      ii tc teret                     SOURceshw  EBB GBAS VDBSch    S lAT6          acu ttti eren rcr ter Sen nate eher eese  ESOURceshw   EBB GBAS VERSIOnDP  iarciet reiten tee id ere tae           115      SOURceshws  BB GBAS WAVeform C REalte                                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS  TRIGger  SEQuence           
241. te         1  doin                          183   5           lt      gt                                                                                                                     183                lt      gt        9                                                                                                          183                lt      gt                                                                                                                         183    Trigger Settings    SOURce  hw   BB VOR TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize  OUTPut                     eese 183    SOURce  hw   BB DME TRIGger OBASeband DELay                 sse 184               lt      gt                                        5                                                                           184                lt      gt        9                                                                                                       184                lt      gt                                                                                                                   184   85           lt      gt                                                                                                                 184   5           lt      gt                                                     1                                                               184    5           lt      gt       115                                                        2                         
242. te Waveform File   With enabled signal generation  triggers the instrument to store the current settings as  an ARB signal in a waveform file  Waveform files can be further processed by the ARB  and or as a multi carrier or a multi segment signal     The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable  the predefined file  extension for waveform files is     wv     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS WAVe  form CREate on page 115                        Enables using of SCAT I header information instead of the default LAAS  GBAS   header    The modulation and TDMA schemes of both systems are identical  the header start  byte is set as listed in table 4 1    Table 4 1  Header start byte       Landing system Header start byte       LAAS  GBAS  OxAAh                   0x99h             Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS SCATi on          115       General Settings    Multiple Frequency Channels   Enables the configuration of VHF Data Broadcast  VDB  transmissions on more than  one frequency channels    See  Carrier frequencies and frequency channels  on page 15    Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS MFCHannels      page 115    Gated Power Mode  Enables gated power mode  see  Power settings       page 17     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS  GPOW on page 116       Sample Rate Variation Sample Rate Info   Sets displays the used sample rate variation  You can set the sample rate value in the   Filter Clipping Sett
243. ternal or external  causes a restart     AAUTo   The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event  occurs  After the trigger event the signal is generated continu   ously  Signal generation is stopped with command  SOUR BB xxx TRIG ARM EXEC  xxx stands for ILS  VOR or  DME  and started again when a trigger event occurs     ARETrigger   The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event  occurs  The device automatically toggles to RETRigger mode   Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart    Signal generation is stopped with command   SOUR  BB  xxx  TRIG  ARM  EXEC and started again when    trig   ger event occurs    SINGIe   The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event  occurs  Then the signal is generated once to the length specified  with command SOUR  BB  xxx  TRIG  SLEN  Every subsequent  trigger event causes a restart      RST  AUTO                                        Manual operation  See  Trigger Mode  on page 85    10 7 Marker Settings DME      SOURce  hw   BB DME MARKer  ch  DELay               sss nennen 187  ESOURce  shw  E BB DME MARKerscehP MODE    riti petat                              188    5           lt      gt                           lt      gt                                                 188   5           lt      gt                              lt      gt                                                     188      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME MARKer lt ch gt  DELay  lt Delay gt     Sets the delay between th
244. tet rene 117    SOURceshw    BB GBAS VDBsch    INSert            1 roter rnm iib      116    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig AID                     esee nennen rennen 120    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig APDesignator                         eese 120    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig ATCHeight                     essent 120    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig ATUSelector                         esee 120    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig  CWAThreshold                          essen 121                        SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates DECimal                                   121    SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DFLocation COORdinates DMS     5           lt      gt        6    5          lt      gt                                     124    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig DG PREDefined CATalog                           see 123                lt       gt                        lt      gt                                                                       123                lt       gt                        lt      gt                                                           122    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig DG USER CATalog                    sss 123    SOURce  hw   BB GBAS VDB  ch   MCONfig DG USER FILE                     seen 123     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig DLOFfset        5           lt      gt        6    5         lt      gt     
245. the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone     See also    SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  LOCalizer  DDM  DEPTh      page 149     Parameters     lt Pct gt  float  Range   80 0 to 80 0  Increment  0 01   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Percent       page 57      SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM POLarity  lt Polarity gt     Sets the polarity for DDM calculation  see     SOURce  hw     BB ILS LOCalizer   DDM  DEPTh on page 149         The DDM depth calculation depends on the selected polarity     e Polarity 90 Hz   150 Hz  default setting    DDM     AM 90 Hz    AM  150 Hz      100      Polarity 150 Hz   90 Hz   DDM     AM 150 Hz    AM  90 Hz      100   Parameters    lt Polarity gt  P90_150     150 90   RST  P90_ 150    Manual operation  See  DDM polarity  on page 54      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM DEPTh   Depth     Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the upper left lobe  90  Hz  and the lower right lobe  150 Hz   The maximum value equals the sum of the mod   ulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone  The following is true     ILS LOC DDM DEPTh    AM 90Hz    AM 150Hz   100        A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB  and the value of the instrument current     Parameters     lt Depth gt  float  Range   0 4 to 0 4  Increment  1E 4   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Depth  on          57    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer FREQuency  lt CarrierFreq gt        Sets th
246. the channel that is simulated     Standard compliant X and Y channels differ in the spacing between the two pulses of  the pulse pair and the reply delay of the ground station  see chapter A 2 3   DME  Channel Frequencies   on page 196   ICAO indicates the ICAO channel parameters  below for selecting the correct channel     System Configuration Settings    Table 7 1  Pulse spacing and reply delay             Channel Pulse spacing Pulse spacing Reply delay Reply delay  interrogation reply mode 1st pulse 2nd pulse  mode   X 12   5 12   5 50 us 50 us   Y 36 us 30 us 56 us 50 us                      Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME            1   on page 165             Carrier Frequency  Available only for  Channel Mode  gt  X Channel    Channel Mode  gt  Y Channel      Sets the carrier frequency of the signal     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  FREQuency      page 166             ICAO Channel  Available only for  Channel Mode  gt  ICAO      Selects the corresponding channel as indicated by ICAO  Refer to chapter A 2 3   DME  Channel Frequencies   on page 196 for an overview of the standard defined DME  transmitting frequencies     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  DME  ICAO  CHANnel on page 166    Range Distance  Available only for  DME Mode  gt  Reply      Sets the simulated distance between the interrogator and the transponder for reply  mode  The distance can be given in nautic miles  NM  or us  1 nm is 1852 01 meters  and corresponds t
247. the file name is required    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message  type 4  on page 112    Usage  Setting only    Manual operation  See  Waypoint File  on page 40      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint USER FILE   Filename    Loads the selected user defined file  extension     txt      Per default  the instrument stores user defined files in the  var user  directory  Use  the command MMEM  CDIRectory to change the default directory to the currently used  one        10 2 6    GBAS Settings    Setting parameters      lt Filename gt  string  For files stored in the default directory  only the file name is  required    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112  Usage  Setting only    Manual operation  See  Waypoint File  on page 40      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig WAYPoint FILE   Queries the currently selected waypoint file     Return values    lt Filename gt  string    filename with file extension      txt     Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message  type 4  on page 112    Usage  Query only    Manual operation  See  Waypoint File  on page 40    Filter  Clipping  Modulation Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS FILTer  TYPE   Type      The command selects the filter type     Parameters     lt Type gt  RCOSine   COSine   GAUSs   LGAuss   CONE   COF705    COEQualizer   COFequalizer   C2K3x   APCO25   SPHase    RECTangle   PGAuss   LPASs  
248. the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon COMid PERiod on page 154             Depth  Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM ID signal     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon COMid DEPTh on page 153                System Configuration Settings Marker Beacons    Time Schema  Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     e  Standard   The set dot length determines the length of the dash  the symbol space and letter  Space        User     You can set each length value seperately     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon COMid  TSCHema on page 154             Dot Length  Sets the length of a Morse dot in seconds     For  Time Schema    Standard  this value determines also the length of the dash   3xDot length   symbol space    Dot length  and letter space  3xDot length      Remote command     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  MBEacon  COMid DOT on page 153    Dash Length  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a Morse dash in milliseconds     Symbol Space  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a symbol space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw    BB ILS MBEacon COMid SYMBol on page 154          Letter Space  Available only for  Time Schema    User      Sets the length of a letter space in milliseconds     Remote command     SOURce  hw      BB  ILS  MBEacon COMid  LETTer on page 153    General Settings    6 VOR Configuration and Settings     gt  
249. tings                                                                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID PPS  lt PulsePairSpacin gt   Sets the morse pulse pair spacing     Parameters    lt PulsePairSpacin gt  float    Range  2   6 to 300E 6  Increment  20   9   RST  100E 6    Manual operation  See  Pulse Pair Spacing  on page 81               SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID PERiod   Period         Sets the period of the COM ID signal in seconds     Parameters      Period   integer  Range  10 to 120   RST  40    Manual operation  See  Period       page 81      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID PRESet             Sets the default settings for the ID signal     Usage  Event                                       SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID RATE   Rate    Sets the pulse repetition rate of the ID sequence     Parameters    lt Rate gt  float    Range  100 to 10E3  Increment  0 01   RST  1350    Manual operation  See  Rate  on          81                              SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID SYMBol   Symbol         Sets the length of the symbol space in seconds     Available only if     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  ID                 is set to USER        10 6    Trigger Settings    Parameters    lt Symbol gt  float    Range  0 05 to 1  Increment  1E 4   RST  0 1    Manual operation  See  Symbol Space  on page 82         SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME ID TSCHema  lt TSchema gt           Sets the time schema for the COM ID signal     In the standard time schema  STD  the set dot length determines the da
250. tings  Manual operation  See  Subcarrier Depth  on page 66      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR SUBCarrier   FREQuency    Frequency   Sets the frequency of the FM carrier    Parameters     lt Frequency gt  float    Range  5E3 to 15E3  Increment  0 01   RST  9 96E3    Manual operation  See  Subcarrier Frequency  on page 66      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR VAR FREQuency   Frequency      Sets the frequency of the variable and the reference signal  As the two signals must  have the same frequency  the setting is valid for both signals     Parameters    lt Frequency gt  float    Range  10 to 60  Increment  0 01   RST  30    Manual operation  See  VAR REF Frequency  on page 66      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR VAR DEPTh   Depth     Sets the AM modulation depth of the 30Hz variable signal     Parameters     Depth   float    Range  0 to 100  Increment  0 1   RST  30    Manual operation  See  VAR Depth  on page 66      SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR BANGle  lt BAngle gt     Sets the bearing angle between the VAR signal and the reference signal  The orienta   tion of the angle can be set with     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  BANGle DIRection     Parameters    lt BAngle gt  float    Range  0 to 360  Increment  0 01   RST  0    Manual operation  See  Bearing Angle  on page 67    VOR Settings         SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR BANGle DIRection  lt Direction gt        Sets the reference position of the phase information   Parameters    lt Direction gt  FROM   TO    FROM  The bearing angle is measured between th
251. track to fix  TF  and radius to fix  RF  legs and pro   vides additional support for terminal area operations     E GBAS  YDB 1  Message Configuration       xl  Message          4    On al    Message Type 4 parameters       FAS Data Set    AP Data Set    On    TAP Data Set  Reference Path Data Selector    Reference Path ID  Number of Path Paints   N    Waypoint File      Braunschweig  FAS RPDS or Continuation Link   3  TAP Vertical Alert Limit   Status    500         TAP Lateral Alert Limit  Status    200    21    Differential GNSS    On       Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig TDSState on          134       Reference Path Data Selector     TAP Data Set  Sets the reference path data selector  that is a numerical identifier that is unique on a  frequency in the broadcast region and used to select the TAP     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt     BB  GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPDT on page 132       Reference Path ID     TAP Data Set  Sets the reference path identifier as three or four alphanumeric characters used to des   ignate the reference path     Remote command      SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS   VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPIT on page 133    Number of Path Points   N     TAP Data Set  Indicates the total number of path points included in this TAP     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS  VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig NOPPoint               131       Waypoint File     TAP Data Set   Accesses the  Select Waypoint File  dialog to select 
252. ts the clipping method  A graphic illustration of the way in which these two meth   ods work is given in the dialog       Vector   i            The limit is related to the amplitude   i         The   and    components are mapped  together  the angle is retained       Scalar  i   q     The limit is related to the absolute maximum of all the   and    values   i              The   and Q components are mapped separately  the angle changes     Remote command       SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS CLIPping MODE on          138          4 6 Global Settings    The buttons in this section lead to dialogs for general trigger  clock and mapping set   tings     Global Trigger Clock Settings  Calls the  Global Trigger Clock Input Settings  dialog     This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold  the input impe   dance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs    The parameters in this dialog affect all digital modulations and standards  and are  described in chapter  Global Trigger Clock Input Settings  in the Operating Manual     General Settings    5 ILS Configuration and Settings     gt       access this dialog select  Baseband Block  gt  ILS      5 1 General Settings    This dialog provides access to the general settings of the ILS standard  like enabling  the standard and selecting the ILS component              Eix    Set To Default   Save Recall       ILS Component  Glidescope  j    System Configuration         Trigger Marker    Auto    Clock      Inter
253. ts the reference path data selector     Parameters    lt Rpdt gt  integer  Range  0 to 254   RST  1  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Reference Path Data Selector  on page 40                             SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPIF  lt Rpif gt           Sets the reference path identifier for FAS     Parameters    lt Rpif gt  string  three or four alphanumeric character  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Reference Path ID  on page 37    GBAS Settings            SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RPIT  lt Rpit gt     Sets the reference path identifier for TAP     Parameters    lt Rpit gt  string  three or four alphanumeric characters  Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Reference Path ID  on page 40                                                      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig RUINdicator   Ruin     Sets the route indicator     Parameters     lt Ruin gt  a single upper case alphabetic character  Allowed are letters  excluding          and           or the  space  charac   ter    Example  see example  Generating a GBAS signal containing message    type 4  on page 112    Manual operation  See  Route Indicator  on page 37                  SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS VDB lt ch gt  MCONfig
254. uA   DDM    857 1 uA    A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM  value and the DDM value in dB     Parameters      Current   float  Range   9 6775E 4 to 9 6775E 4  Increment  1E 7   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Current  on page 56      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM DIRection   Direction     Sets the simulation mode for the ILS LOC modulation signal  A change of the setting  automatically changes the sign of the DDM value     Parameters    lt Direction gt  LEFT   RIGHt    LEFT   The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is  negative  the airplane is too far to the right  it must turn to the  left      RIGHT   The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant  the DDM value is  positive  the airplane is too far to the left  it must turn to the  right      RST  LEFT    Manual operation  See  Fly  on page 56     SOURce  hw   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM LOGarithmic  lt Logarithmic gt   Sets the depth of modulation value for the ILS LOC in dB     See also     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  ILS  LOCalizer DDM DEPTh      page 149        Parameters     lt Logarithmic gt  float  Range   999 9 to 999 9  Increment  1E 4   RST  0    Manual operation  See  DDM Logarithmic  on page 57    ILS Settings      SOURce lt hw gt   BB ILS LOCalizer DDM PCT   Pct      Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the left lobe  90 Hz   and the right lobe  150 Hz   The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation  depths of 
255. utive slave instruments must  have the same length and type  Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points         None   The instrument is working in stand alone mode    e  Sync  Master   The instrument provides all connected instruments with its synchronisation  includ   ing the trigger signal  and reference clock signal    e  Sync  Slave   The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock signal from  another instrument working in a master mode     Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS CLOCk  SYNChronization MODE on page 193    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS CLOCk  SYNChronization  MODE      page 193  B  B             SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  CLOCk  SYNChronization  MODE on          193     SOURce lt hw gt    BB  DME  CLOCk  SYNChronization MODE               193                Clock Settings    Set Synchronization Settings   for R amp S SMBV only     Performs an automatic adjustment of the instrument s settings required for the synchro   nization mode  selected with the parameter  Synchronization Mode      Remote command        SOURce lt hw gt    BB GBAS CLOCk  SYNChronization EXECute on page 192    SOURce lt hw gt    BB ILS CLOCk  SYNChronization EXECute on page 192     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  VOR  CLOCk  SYNChronization EXECute on page 192     SOURce lt hw gt     BB  DME  CLOCk  SYNChronization EXECute on page 192             Clock Source  Selects the clock source        Internal   The internal clock reference is used to generate the symbol
256. x stands for ILS  VOR or DME           input is made in terms of samples              It is possible to output deliberately just part of the frame  an exact sequence of the  frame  or a defined number of repetitions of the frame     Parameters     lt SeqLength gt  integer  Range  1 samples to 2432 1 samples   RST  100    Manual operation  See  Trigger Signal Duration  on page 86      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger SLUNit  lt Slunit gt   Sets the units the trigger sequence length is exprecced in   Parameters    lt Slunit gt  SEQuence   SAMPle    RST  SEQuence    Manual operation  See  Signal Duration Unit  on page 86      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger SOURce  lt TriggerSource gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger SOURce   Source     SOURce lt hw  gt   BB ILS TRIGger SOURce  lt TriggerSource gt     SOURce lt hw gt   BB VOR TRIGger SOURce  lt TriggerSource gt     Selects the trigger source     Parameters    lt TriggerSource gt  INTernal EXTernal  INTernal  manual trigger or   TRG   EXTernal  trigger signal on the TRIGGER connector      RST  INTernal    Manual operation  See  Trigger Source  on page 87      SOURce lt hw gt   BB DME TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   DELay   Delay      SOURce lt hw gt   BB GBAS TRIGger  EXTernal lt ch gt   DELay   Delay       SOURce  hw   BB ILS TRIGger   EXTernal  ch   DELay   Delay      SOURce  hw   BB VOR TRIGger  EXTernal  ch    DELay   Delay     Sets the trigger delay     Trigger Settings  Parameters    lt Delay gt  float  Range  0 to 6553
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
SUB 6S SUB 8S SUB 4600/75 SUB 6000/75  Bryston PRE-AMPLIFIER 12B User's Manual  Descot: Distributed Code Repository Framework    Trane Gas Unit Heaters Installation and Maintenance Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file